[featured_image]
Download
Download is available until [expire_date]
  • Version 1.3
  • Download 1022
  • Tamanho do Arquivo 27.59 MB
  • File Count 1
  • Data de Criação 30 de março de 2020
  • Ultima Atualização 30 de março de 2020

Manual XBM H2/XBM HP

Programmable Logic Controller
XGB Main unit(XBM-H(P) Type)
XGT Series
XBM-DN32H2
XBM-DN32HP
XBM-DP32H2
XBM-DP32HP
User’s Manual
※XBM-DN32H(V2)
- XBM-DN32H V2 new model
- O/S:V2.0 or above, H/W: V2.0
- Actual PLC name is XBM-DN32H
- This manual provides information about
New XBM-DN32H and XBM-DN32HP
- In case of previous version, please refer to
previous XBM-DN32H manual(10310001563).

Safety Instruction
Before using the product …
For your safety and effective operation, please read the safety instructions
thoroughly before using the product.
Safety Instructions should always be observed in order to prevent accident
or risk with the safe and proper use the product.
Instructions are separated into “Warning” and “Caution”, and the meaning of
the terms is as follows;
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,if
not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices
The marks displayed on the product and in the user’s manual have the
following meanings
.
Be careful! Danger may be expected.
Be careful! Electric shock may occur.
The user’s manual even after read shall be kept available and accessible to
any user of the product
.
Warning
Caution

Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions when designing
Please, install protection circuit on the exterior of PLC to protect
the whole control system from any error in external power or PLC
module.
Any abnormal output or operation may cause serious problem
in safety of the whole system.
- Install applicable protection unit on the exterior of PLC to protect
the system from physical damage such as emergent stop switch,
protection circuit, the upper/lowest limit switch, forward/reverse
operation interlock circuit, etc.
- If any system error (watch-dog timer error, module installation error,
etc.) is detected during CPU operation in PLC, the whole output is
designed to be turned off and stopped for system safety. However,
in case CPU error if caused on output device itself such as relay or
TR can not be detected, the output may be kept on, which may
cause serious problems. Thus, you are recommended to install an
addition circuit to monitor the output status.
Never connect the overload than rated to the output module nor
allow the output circuit to have a short circuit
, which may cause a
fire.
Never let the external power of the output circuit be designed to
be On earlier than PLC power
, which may cause abnormal output or
operation.
In case of data exchange between computer or other external
equipment and PLC through communication or any operation of
PLC (e.g. operation mode change), please install interlock in the
sequence program to protect the system from any error
. If not, it
may cause abnormal output or operation.
Warning
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions when designing
Safety Instructions when designing
I/O signal or communication line shall be wired at least 100mm
away from a high-voltage cable or power line.
If not, it may cause
abnormal output or operation.
Caution
Use PLC only in the environment specified in PLC manual or
general standard of data sheet.
If not, electric shock, fire, abnormal
operation of the product or flames may be caused.
Before installing the module, be sure PLC power is off. If not,
electric shock or damage on the product may be caused.
Be sure that each module of PLC is correctly secured. If the
product is installed loosely or incorrectly, abnormal operation, error or
dropping may be caused.
Be sure that I/O or extension connecter is correctly secured. If
not, electric shock, fire or abnormal operation may be caused.
If lots of vibration is expected in the installation environment,
don’t let PLC directly vibrated.
Electric shock, fire or abnormal
operation may be caused.
Don’t let any metallic foreign materials inside the product, which
may cause electric shock, fire or abnormal operation.
.
Caution
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions when wiring
Prior to wiring, be sure that power of PLC and external power is
turned off.
If not, electric shock or damage on the product may be
caused.
Before PLC system is powered on, be sure that all the covers of
the terminal are securely closed.
If not, electric shock may be caused
Warning
Let the wiring installed correctly after checking the voltage rated
of each product and the arrangement of terminals.
If not, fire,
electric shock or abnormal operation may be caused.
Secure the screws of terminals tightly with specified torque when
wiring.
If the screws of terminals get loose, short circuit, fire or abnormal
operation may be caused.
*
Surely use the ground wire of Class 3 for FG terminals, which is
exclusively used for PLC
. If the terminals not grounded correctly,
abnormal operation may be caused.
Don’t let any foreign materials such as wiring waste inside the
module while wiring,
which may cause fire, damage on the product
or abnormal operation
.
Caution
Safety Instruction
Safety Instructions for test-operation or repair
Safety Instructions for waste disposal
Don’t touch the terminal when powered. Electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.
Prior to cleaning or tightening the terminal screws, let all the
external power off including PLC power.
If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.
Don’t let the battery recharged, disassembled, heated, short or
soldered
. Heat, explosion or ignition may cause injuries or fire.
Warning
Don’t remove PCB from the module case nor remodel the module.
Fire, electric shock or abnormal operation may occur.
Prior to installing or disassembling the module, let all the external
power off including PLC power.
If not, electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.
Keep any wireless installations or cell phone at least 30cm away
from PLC
. If not, abnormal operation may be caused.
Caution
Product or battery waste shall be processed as industrial waste.
The waste may discharge toxic materials or explode itself.
Caution
Revision History
Version Date Remark Part Page
V 1.0 2017.11 1. First Edition - -
V1.1 2018.06
1. XBM-DN32H(V2)
XBM-DN32H2
2. Chapter 12 Motor Wiring Example Added 3
-
Ch12
V1.2 2019.09
1. Added Counter Clear Function
2. Added PID Derivative term
2
2
Ch4
Ch5
V1.3 2020.02
1. Added XBM-DP32H2/HP Main Unit
2. Improved I/O Wiring Diagram
2, 3
2-Ch3
3-Ch2,3
2-Ch3
The number of User’s manual is indicated the right side of the back cover.
LSIS Co.,Ltd. 2017 All Rights Reserved.
About User’s Manual
About User’s Manual
Congratulations on purchasing PLC of LSIS Co.,Ltd.
Before use, make sure to carefully read and understand the User’s Manual about the functions,
performances, installation and programming of the product you purchased in order for correct use and
importantly, let the end user and maintenance administrator to be provided with the User’s Manual.
The Use’s Manual describes the product. If necessary, you may refer to the following description and order
accordingly. In addition, you may connect our website(
http://www.lsis.com/) and download the information as
a PDF file.
Relevant User’s Manual

Title Description No. of User
Manual
XG5000 User’s
Manual
It describes how to use XG5000 software especially about
online functions such as programming, printing, monitoring
and debugging by using XGT series products.
10310000512
XGK/XGB Series
Instruction &
Programming
It describes how to use the instructions for programming
using XGK/XGB series.
10310000510
XBC
Ultimate Performance
XGB Unit
It describes how to use XGB main unit, system configuration,
mechanism ,program function ,input/output function, Built-in
High-speed Counter, Datalog, PID Control, Built-in
Communication function, Built-in Position, Built-in Analog
input/output.
.
10310001374
XGB Analog
User’s Manual
It describes how to use the specification of analog
input/analog output/temperature input module, system
configuration and built-in PID control for XGB main unit.
10310000920
XGB Position
User’s Manual
It describes how to use built-in Position function for XGB
main unit.
10310000927
XGB Cnet I/F
User’s Manual
It describes how to use built-in communication function for
XGB main unit and external Cnet I/F module.
10310000816
XGB Fast Ethernet I/F
User’s Manual
It describes how to use XGB FEnet I/F module. 10310000873
CANopen
Commnunication
Module
It describes how to use XGB CANopen Commnunication
Module
0310001245
EtherNet/IP
Commnunication
Module
It describes how to use XGB EtherNet/IP Communication
module
10310001159
XGB Profibus-DP I/F
(Master) User
s
Manaual
It describes how to use XGB Profibus-DP I/F
(Master) Commnunication Module
10310001310
XGB Profibus-DP I/F
(Slave) User
s
Manaual
It describes how to use XGB Profibus-DP I/F
(Slave) Commnunication Module
10310001410
XGB DeviceNet I/F
(Slave) User
s
Manaual
It describes how to use XGB DeviceNet I/F
(Slave) Commnunication Module
10310001414
XGB High speed
counter module User’s
Manual
It describes how to use High speed counter(XBF-HO02A,
XBF-HD02A)
10310001240

Contents
1: System
Chapter 1 Introduction ....................................................................... 1-1~1-17
1.1 Guide to Use This Manual......................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Features ..................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Terminology ............................................................................................... 1-5
Chapter 2 System Configuration ........................................................... 2-1~2-13
2.1 Table of Products Configuration ..................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Classification and Type of Product Name ............................................. 2-3
2.3 XBM ‘H(P)’ Type’s System Configuration ................................................... 2-8
Chapter 3 Specifications ........................................................................ 3-1~3-9
3.1 Names and Functions of Each Part ......................................................... 3-1
3.2 General specifications .............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Power specifications ................................................................................. 3-4
3.4 Battery ........................................................................................................ 3-7
3.5 Performance specifications...................................................................... 3-8
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring..............................................................4-1~4-18
4.1 Parameter & Operation data ..................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Attachment/Detachment of Modules ........................................................ 4-7
4.3 Wire........................................................................................................... 4-13

Chapter 5 Maintenance .............................................................................. 5-1~5-2
5.1 Maintenance and Inspection ............................................................................ 5-1
5.2
Daily Inspection................................................................................................... 5-1
5.3
Periodic Inspection............................................................................................. 5-2
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting....................................................................... 6-1~6-13
6.1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting ............................................................. 6-1
6.2
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3
Troubleshooting Questionnaire....................................................................... 6-7
6.4
Troubleshooting Examples............................................................................... 6-8
6.5
Error Code List .................................................................................................. 6-12
Chapter 7 EMC Standard............................................................................ 7-1~7-4
7.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive .................................... 7-1
7.2
Requirement to Conform to the Low-voltage Directive ............................. 7-4
2: Basic Functions
Chapter 1 Program Configuration and Operation Method ........................ 1-1~1-34
1.1 Programming Basics................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Operation Mode ....................................................................................... 1-24
1.3 Memory..................................................................................................... 1-30
Chapter 2 CPU Function .......................................................................... 2-1~2-36
2.1 Type Setting ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Parameter Setting ...................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Self-Diagnosis Function ........................................................................... 2-5
2.4 RTC Function ........................................................................................... 2-12
2.5 Time Counter Function ........................................................................... 2-14
2.6 Remote Function ..................................................................................... 2-19
2.7 I/O forced On/Off Function ..................................................................... 2-20
2.8 Direct I/O Function .................................................................................. 2-21
2.9 Function saving the operation history .................................................. 2-22
2.10 How to allocate I/O No........................................................................... 2-23
2.10 Modification procedures during RUN. ................................................. 2-24
2.12 Read I/O information ............................................................................. 2-27
2.13 Monitoring Functions ............................................................................ 2-28
2.14 PLC’s Read-Protect Function ............................................................... 2-33
2.15 Function to delete all of the PLC .......................................................... 2-34
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications...................................................... 3-1~3-28
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Main Unit Digital Input Specifications ..................................................... 3-4
3.3 Main Unit Digital Output Specifications................................................... 3-5
3.4 Digital Input Specifications....................................................................... 3-7
3.5 Digital Output Specifications.................................................................. 3-10
3.6 Combined Digital I/O module Input Specification ................................. 3-19

3.7 Combined Digital I/O module Output Specification .............................. 3-21
3.8 I/O modules’ Functions ........................................................................... 3-23
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function....................................... 4-1~4-29
4.1 High-speed Counter Specifications ......................................................... 4-1
4.2 Installation and Wiring ............................................................................ 4-21
4.3 Internal Memory ....................................................................................... 4-22
4.4 Examples: Using High-speed Counter .................................................. 4-26
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function ............................................................ 5-1~5-50
5.1 Features of Built-in PID Function ............................................................. 5-1
5.2 Basic Theory of PID Control ..................................................................... 5-2
5.3 Functional Specifications of PID Control ................................................ 5-9
5.4 Usage of PID Control Functions ............................................................ 5-10
5.5 PID Instructions ....................................................................................... 5-26
5.6 PID Auto-tuning ....................................................................................... 5-28
5.7 Example Programs .................................................................................. 5-37
5.8 Error / Warning Codes ............................................................................ 5-48

3: Positioning
Chapter 1 Overview ................................................................................ 1-1~1-12
1.1 General ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Purpose of Positioning Control ............................................................... 1-3
1.3 Operation Sequence of Positioning ......................................................... 1-3
1.4 Function overview of embedded positioning ......................................... 1-5
Chapter 2 Specifications............................................................................ 2-1~2-5
2.1 Performance Specifications ..................................................................... 2-1
2.2 External Interface I/O Specifications ....................................................... 2-3
Chapter 3 Operation Order and Installation ........................................... 3-1~3-4
3.1 Operation Order ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Installation ................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Notices in Wiring ....................................................................................... 3-3
Chapter 4 Positioning Control.................................................................... 4-1~4-3
4.1 Positioning task ......................................................................................... 4-1
Chapter 5 Positioning Parameter & Operation Data ............................ 5-1~5-46
5.1 Parameter & Operation data ..................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Basic Parameter ........................................................................................ 5-2
5.3 Extended Parameter .................................................................................. 5-6
5.4 Manual Parameter ................................................................................... 5-18
5.5 Homing Parameter .................................................................................. 5-19
5.6 I/O Signal Parameter ............................................................................... 5-23

5.7 Common Parameter ................................................................................ 5-24
5.8 Operation Data ......................................................................................... 5-26
Chapter 6 Positioning Monitoring Package ......................................... 6-1~6-17
6.1 Internal Memory ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 K area Signal.............................................................................................. 6-9
Chapter 7 Positioning Monitoring Package ......................................... 7-1~7-63
7.1 System Composition and Setting of Input and Output .......................... 7-1
7.2 Dedicated Commands ............................................................................... 7-7
7.3 Use of Dedicated Command ................................................................... 7-63
Chapter 8 Program ................................................................................. 8-1~8-47
8.1 Example of Programming ......................................................................... 8-1
Chapter 9 Functions ............................................................................... 9-1~9-12
9.1 Homing ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Positioning Control ................................................................................. 9-12
9.3 Manual Operation Control .................................................................... 9-101
9.4 Synchronous Control ............................................................................ 9-108
9.5 Modification Function of Control ......................................................... 9-127
9.6 Auxiliary Function of Control ............................................................... 9-145
9.7 Data Modification Function .................................................................. 9-151
Chapter 10 Positioning Error Information & Solutions ................... 10-1~10-15
10.1 Positioning Error Information & Solutions .......................................... 10-1
Chapter 11 Internal Memory Address of “ReadWrite Variable Data”
command.doc ..................................................................................... 11-1~10-15

11.1 Parameter memory address ................................................................. 11-1
11.2 Axis1 operation data memory address ................................................ 11-6
11.3 Axis2 operation data memory address .............................................. 11-15
11.4 Axis3 operation data memory address .............................................. 11-24
11.5 Axis4 operation data memory address .............................................. 11-33
11.6 Axis5 operation data memory address .............................................. 11-42
11.7 Axis6 operation data memory address .............................................. 11-51
11.8 CAM data memory address ................................................................ 11-60
11.9 user CAM data memory address ...................................................... 11-153
Chapter 12 Motor Wiring Example ...................................................... 12-1~12-4
12.1 Stepping Motor Wiring Example .......................................................... 12-1
12.2 Servo Motor Wiring Example ................................................................ 12-2
4: Communication
Chapter 1 Built-in FEnet Communication........................................... 1-1~1-100
1.1 Outline ........................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Specifications ............................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Specifications of installation and a trial run ........................................... 1-8
1.4 Configuration of FEnet communication system ................................... 1-12
1.5 Protocols for each service...................................................................... 1-14
1.6 Dedicated services .................................................................................. 1-29
1.7 P2P services ............................................................................................ 1-35
1.8 High speed link ........................................................................................ 1-62
1.9 Remote communication .......................................................................... 1-72
1.10 E-mail Transfer(SMTP) .......................................................................... 1-78
1.11 Time synchronization(SNTP) ................................................................ 1-93
1.12 Trouble Shooting ................................................................................... 1-98

Chapter 2 Built-in Cnet Communication............................................. 2-1~2-122
2.1 General ....................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Specification .............................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Cnet Communication System Configuration .......................................... 2-8
2.4Basic Setting for Communication ........................................................... 2-15
2.5 Server Function and P2P service ........................................................... 2-22
2.6 XGT Dedicated Protocol ......................................................................... 2-46
2.7 LSBus Protocol ....................................................................................... 2-66
2.8 MODBus Protocol .................................................................................... 2-72
2.9 Diagnosis Function ................................................................................. 2-87
2.10 Example Program .................................................................................. 2-96
2.11 Error Code ............................................................................................ 2-121
Appendix
Appendix 1 Flag List ........................................................... App. 1-1~App.1-11
Appendix 1.1 Special Relay (F) List ...................................................... App. 1-1
Appendix 1.2 Communication Relay (L) List........................................ App. 1-6
Appendix 1.3 Network Register (N) List ............................................ App. 1-10
Appendix 2 Dimension ............................................................. App.2-1~App.2-4
Appendix 3 Instruction List ................................................... App.3-1~App.3-41
Appendix 3.1 Classification of Instructions .......................................... App.4-1
Appendix 3.2 Basic Instructions .......................................................... App.4-2
Appendix 3.3 Application Instruction .................................................. App.4-5
Appendix 3.4 Special/Communication Instruction ............................ App.4-38

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-1

 

Part 1. System

Chapter 1 Introduction
1.1 Guide to this Manual
This manual includes specifications, functions and handling instructions for XGB series PLC. This manual is divided up into
chapters as follows

No. Title Contents
1.System Chapter 1 Introduction Describes configuration of this manual, unit’s features and
terminology.
Chapter 2 System Configurations Describes available units and system configuration in the
XGB series.
Chapter 3 Specifications Describes general specifications of units used in the XGB
series.
Chapter 4 CPU Specifications Describes performances, specifications and operations.
Chapter 5 Maintenance Describes the check items and method for long-term
normal operation of the PLC system.
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Describes various operation errors and corrective actions.
Chapter 7 EMC Specifications Describes system configuration following EMC
specification.
2.Main Chapter 1 Program Configuration and Operation
Method
Describes performances, specifications and operations.
Chapter 2 CPU Specifications
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications Describes operation of basic and input/output.
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function Describes built-in high-speed counter functions.
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function Describes Built-in PID Function
3.Positioning Chapter 1 Overview Describes the specification, method to use each
positioning function, programming and the wiring with
external equipment of embedded positioning function.
Chapter 2 Specifications Describes general specifications of Positing function.
Chapter 3 Before Positioning Describes the Operation order in case of positioning
operation by embedded positioning.
Chapter 4 Positioning Check Describes parameter and operation data to be set by
software package with embedded positioning.
Chapter 5 Positioning Instructions

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-2

3.Positioning Chapter 6 Introduction to Positioning Monitoring
Package
Describes Positioning Monitoring Package
Chapter 7 Program Examples of Programming Describes Examples of Programming
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Procedure Describes errors and Troubleshooting
Chapter 9 Positioning Instruction and K area List Describes the Operation order in case of positioning
operation by embedded positioning.
Chapter 10 Motor Wiring Example Describes wiringexamples.
4.Commun
ications
Chapter 1 Built-in FEnet Communication Describes Ethernet communications.
Chapter 2 Built-in Cnet Communication Describes serial(232/485) communications.

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-3

1.2 Features
The features of XGB system are as follows.
1.2.1 Advanced Performances
(1) Rapid Processing Speed
The processing speed has been improved up to more than 75% compared to the existing XBM PLC.

Items XBM ‘S' Type XBM ‘H2/HP’ Type Remarks
Sequence
command
160 ㎱ 40 ㎱ Based on
MLOAD command
Data command 3.52 ㎲ 1.22 ㎲ Based on MOV command
Real 10.3 ㎲ 2.0 ㎲ RADD command
10.6 ㎲ 2.0 ㎲ RMUL command
Long Real 11.8 ㎲ 3.7 ㎲ LADD command
16.9 ㎲ 3.7 ㎲ LMUL command

 

Items XBM ‘S' Type XBM ‘H2/HP’ Type Remarks
Program capacity 10KStep 64KStep
Data capacity 5120word 32,768 word Based on D area

(3) Advanced functions
-Built -in 10/100 BASE-TX Ethernet(max 16 channel P2P service)
- provide EtherCAT expansion module
(4) Permanent data back up : permanent data back up is available by implementing MRAM.
1.2.2 Flexibility of System Configuration
(1) The small and medium-sized system can be established, which controls up to 256 points I/O through 7-
stage expansion.
(2) Compact size
Compared to the existing XGB basic unit, this product has various embedded functions to enhance
functionality and has a reduced size so you can install it even in a small space. (Unit :
)

Type Model Size (W * H * D) Remarks
Basic unit XBM-DN32HP/XBM-DN32H2 42 * 90 * 64
XBF-,XBE-,XBL- 20* 90 * 60 Based on mimimum size

(3) Securing compatibility of the existing expansion/special/communication module
All types of the existing XGB expansion/special/communication modules are available.
(4) Expanding the applications through various expansion modules
- It provides 8 points, 16 points, 32 points module I/O expansion module (In the case of relay output, 8/16
points module) with single input, single output, mixed I/O module.
- It supports various special modules such as positioning, high-speed counter, analog I/O, temperature
input, temperature control.
- It provides various communication I/F modules such as Cnet, FEnet, RAPIEnet, CANOpen, Profibus-DP,

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-4
DeviceNet.
1.2.3 Powerful Embedded Functions
(1) Embedded high-speed counter function
- The high-speed counter with up to 100kpps 4 channels(based on 1 phase 1 input 1 multiplication) is
embedded.
- Various additional functions such as comparative readout, comparative task, frequency measurement,
revolutions per hour, etc. are provided.
- Parameter setting using XG5000, various monitoring and diagnosis functions are provided.
- You can conduct a trial run through XG5000’s monitoring without the program so you can easily check of
abnormalities of external wirings and data setting.
.
(2) Embedded communication function
- It has embedded Cnet 2 channels and Enet 1 channel at the same time.
- It can communicate with other devices very easily without the special communication I/F module by using the
embedded communication function.
- It enhances convenience by providing various protocols such as dedicated communication, customization,
etc.
-You can check the communication state very easily thanks to the diagnosis function and
-Transmitting receiving frame monitoring function.
(3) Embedded PID function
- It supports the embedded PID control function up to 16 loops.
- It provides parameter setting using XG5000, convenient loop state monitoring through trend monitor.
- You can get the control constant easily by the improved automatic synchronization function.
- You can improve control accuracy by using various additional functions such as PWM output, ∆MV, ∆PV,
SV Ramp, etc.
- It provides various control modes such as forward/reverse mixed operation, 2-stage SV PID control,
cascade control, etc.
-You can secure stability through various alarm functions such as PV MAX, PV change warning, etc.
(4) Embedded position control function(XGB-XBMH2: 2axis, XGB-XBMH P: 6axis)
- The open collector output positioning function with up to 200kpps 2-axis is embedded.
- It provides parameter setting using XG-PM which support operation data edition, diverse
monitoring and diagnosis functions.
- You can conduct a trial run through XG-PM monitoring without the program so you can easily check the
external wirings and operation data.
1.2.4 Easy maintenance
(1) Program modularize for Multi-programing and multi tasks for maintenance are available.
(2) Built-in RTC(real time clock) function make it possible to control schedule maintenance and history.
(3) Integrated program environment
-Separated XG5000(ladder programming, parameter setting, monitoring ) and XG-PD(communication and
network parameter setting, frame monitoring) have combined in one XG.5000. It is possible to control PLC in
one programming.

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-5

1.3 Terminology
1.3.1 General term
The following table gives definition of terms used in this manual.

Terms Definition Remark
Module A standard element that has a specified function which configures
the system. Devices such as I/O board, which inserted onto the
mother board.
Example)
Expansion
module,
Specialmodule,
Communication
module
Unit A single module or group of modules that perform an independent
operation as a part of PLC systems.
Example)
Main unit,
Expansion unit
PLC System A system which consists of the PLC and peripheral devices.
A user program can control the system.
-
XG5000 A program and debugging tool for the MASTER-K series.
It executes program creation, edit, compile and debugging.
(PADT: Programming Added Debugging Tool)
-
XG-PM Exclusive tool for modifying position parameter like Built-in position,
network type position
I/O image area Internal memory area of the CPU module which used to hold I/O
status.
Cnet Computer Network -
FEnet Fast Ethernet Network -
RAPInet RAPInet Network -
CANopen Controller Area Network -
Pnet Profibus-DP Network -
Dnet DeviceNet Network -
RTC Abbreviation of ‘Real Time Clock’. It is used to call general IC that
contains clock function.
-
Watchdog
Timer
Supervisors the pre-set execution times of programs and warns if a
program is not competed within the pre-set time.
-

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-6

Terms Definition Remark
Task It refers to the program start condition. There are 6 types such as
initialization, constant cycle, internal contact, external contact, high-speed
counter task, and positioning task.
Sink Input Current flows from the switch to the PLC input terminal if a input signal
turns on.
Z: Input
impedance
Source Input Current flows from the PLC input terminal to the switch after a input signal
turns on.
Z: Input
impedance
Sink Output Current flows from the load to the output terminal and the PLC output
turn on.
-
Source Output Current flows from the output terminal to the load and the PLC output
turn on.
-

 

-

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-7

1.3.2 Serial communication term
(1) Communication type
(a) Simplex
This is the communication type that data is transferred in a constant direction. Information can not be transferred in the
reverse direction.
(b) Half-Duplex
Data is transferred in two ways with one cable if time interval provided, though it can’t be transferred simultaneously.
(c) Full-Duplex
Data is simultaneously transferred and received in two ways with two cables.
(2)
Transmission type
(a) Serial transmission
This type transmits bit by bit via 1 cable. The speed of transmission is slow, but the cost of installation is low and the
software is simplified.

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

 

송신
TX
수신
RX

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RS-232C, RS-422 and RS-485 are the examples

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-8
(b) Parallel transmission
This type is used in printer, etc., which transmits data in unit of 1 byte, so the speed is high and the accuracy of data
is reliable. However, the longer the transmission distance is, the higher the cost of installation is geometrically.

0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

 

송신
TX
수신
RX
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0

(3) Asynchronous Communication
This communication type transmits characters one by one synchronously in serial transmission. At this time,
synchronous signal (Clock, etc.) is not transmitted. Character code is transmitted with a start bit attached to the head of 1
character, and it is finished with a stop bit attached to the tail.

ENQ
(05H)
STOP START PARITY

 

K STOP PARITY START

 

O STOP PARITY START

 

R STOP PARITY START

 

E STOP PARITY START

For transmitting KOREA
Transmission Direction
Stop Bit Parity Bit Data Bits Start Bit

EOT
(04H)
STOP START PARITY

 

A STOP PARITY START

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-9

(4) Protocol
This is communication rule established in relation between the transmission side and the receiving side of information in
order to send and accept information between two computers/terminals or more without error, effectively, and reliably. In
general, this specifies call establishment, connection, structure of message exchange form, re-transmission of error
message, procedure of line inversion, and character synchronization between terminals, etc.
(5) BPS(Bits Per Second)
CPS(Characters Per Second)
BPS is a unit of transfer rate that represents how many bits are transferred per second. CPS is the number of the
characters transferred for a second. Generally, one character is 1Byte (8Bits), so CPS is the number of bytes which can
be transferred per second.
(6) Node
Node is a term that means the connected nodes of the data in the network tree structure, generally network is composed
of a great number of nodes, and is also expressed as the station number.
(7) Packet
Packet, a compound term of package and bucket used for packet exchange type to send information as divided in a unit
of packet, separates transferred data into the defined length to add a header that presents the correspondent addresses
(station No., etc.) thereto.
(8) Port
Port is meant to be the part of the data process device which sends or receives the data from a remote control terminal in
data communications, but in Cnet serial communication is meant to be the RS-232C or RS-422 port.
(9) RS-232C
RS-232C is the interface to link a modem with a terminal and to link a modem with a computer, and is also the serial
communications specification established by EIA according to the recommendations of the CCITT. This is also used to
link the null modem directly as well as the modem linkage. The disadvantage is that the transfer length is short and that
only 1 : 1 communication is available, and the specifications which have overcome this disadvantage are RS-422 and
RS-485.
(10) RS-422/RS-485
As one of the serial transmission specifications, its transferring length is long with 1 : N connection available compared to
RS-232C. The difference of these two specifications is that RS-422 uses 4 signals of TX(+), TX(-), RX(+) and RX(-),
while RS-485 has 2 signals of (+) & (-), where data is sent and received through the same signal line. Accordingly, RS-
422 executes the full-duplex type of communication and RS-485 executes the half-duplex type of communication.

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-10
(11) Half Duplex Communication
Two-way communication is available, however simultaneous communication of transmission & receiving isn’t available.
This communication type is applied to RS-485 for instance. It is used a lot for multi-drop communication type which
communicates via one signal line by several stations. Half Duplex Communication results from the transmission
characteristic performed by stations one by one not allowing simultaneous transmission by multi stations due to the data
damage of data impact caused by the simultaneous multi-transmission of the stations. The figure below shows an
example of structure based on Half Duplex Communication. Each station in communication with the terminal as linked
with each other can send or receive data via one line so to execute communication with all stations, where multi-sever is
advantageously available.
(12) Full Duplex Communication
Two way-communications of simultaneous transmission & receiving is available. This communication type is applied to
RS-232C & RS-422. Since the transmission line is separated from the receiving line, simultaneous transmission &
receiving is available without data impact, so called as Full Duplex Communication. The figure shows an example of
structure based on RS-422 of Full Duplex Communication. Since transmission terminal of the client station and receiving
terminals of the sever stations are connected to one line, and transmission terminals of the sever stations are linked with
receiving terminal of the client station, the communication between sever stations is unavailable with the restricted
function of multi-sever.

RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX

 

RX TX
RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX

Client
Server Server Server Server
Client
Server Server Server Server

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-11

(13) BCC (Block Check Character)
As serial transmission may have signals distorted due to undesirable noise in transmission line, BCC is used as data to
help receiving side to check the signals if normal or distorted and to detect errors in signals as compared with the
received BCC after calculating BCC by receiving side itself using the data input to the front terminal of BCC.
(14) XG5000 service
This is the function to remotely perform programming, reading/writing user’s program, debugging, and monitoring, etc.
without moving the physical connection of XG5000 in the network system where PLC is connected to Cnet I/F module.
Especially, it is convenient to control a remote PLC via modem.
* XG5000 : Programming software of XGT PLC for Windows
Relay station
Public network
line
Public network
line

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-12
(15) Frame
Frame is composed of transmitted and received data as in a specified form in data communication including additional
information of segments [station No., command, parameter by command], control characters [ENQ, ACK, EOT, ETX] for
synchronization, parity for detecting error, and BCC. The structure of frame used for serial communication of Cnet is as
follows.

Head Tail
Segment
ACK ETX BCC Station
No.
Comm
and
Proces
sing
Result
ENQ EOT Station
No.
Parameter by Commend BCC Comm
and
Head Segment Tail

Request Frame
Response Frame
[Structure of general Tx/Rx frame]
- Head: ASCII value indicating frame start.
- Tail: ASCII value indicating frame end.
- BCC (Block Check Character)
Check data for Tx/Rx frame
Used to inspect reliability of data with such various methods as ADD, OR, Exclusive OR, MULTPLY, etc
(16) Reset
This function is used to initialize the communication module with errors.
Use XG-PD to select [On-Line] → [Reset] so to execute Reset, which will restart PLC.

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-13

1.3.3 Ethernet term
This chapter describes about the general terminology of FEnet I/F module. For more detail, refer to professional book on the
Ethernet
(1) IEEE 802.3
IEEE 802.3 specifies standards for CSMA/CD based Ethernet. Exactly it is a LAN based on CSMA/CD (Carrier
Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) Ethernet designed by IEEE 802.3 group, which is classified into
detailed projects as specified below;
A) IEEE P802.3 - 10G Base T study Group
B) IEEE P802.3ah - Ethernet in the First Mile Task Force
C) IEEE P802.3ak - 10G Base-CX4 Task Force
Ethernet and IEEE 802.3 are standardized at RFC894 and RFC1042 so each should process another frame.
(2) ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)
Protocol to search for MAC address by means of correspondent IP address on the Ethernet LAN
(3) Bridge
A device used to connect two networks so to be operated as one network. Bridge is used not only to connect two
different types of networks but also to divide one big network into two small networks in order to increase the
performance
(4) Client
A user of the network service, or a computer or program (mainly the one requesting services) using other
computer’s resource.
(5) CSMA/CD(Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection)
Each client checks if there is any sign prior to transmission of data to the network (Carrier Sense) and then sends
its data when the network is empty. At this time, all the clients have the equal right to send (Multiple Access). If two
or more clients send data, collision may occur. The client who detects the collision tries to send again in a specific
time.
(6) DNS (Domain Name System)
A method used to convert alphabetic Domain Name on the Internet to its identical Internet number (namely, IP
address)
(7) Dot Address
Shows IP address of ‘100.100.100.100’, where each figure is displayed in decimal with 1 byte occupied
respectively for 4 bytes in total.

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-14
(8) E-mail Address
The address of the user with login account for the specific machine connected via the Internet. Usually user’s ID @
domain name (machine name) is assigned. In other words, it will be like hjjee@microsoft.com, where @ is called
as ‘at’ displayed with shift+2 pressed on the keyboard. The letters at the back of @ are for the domain name of
specific company (school, institute,..) connected with the Internet, and the letters in front of @ are for the user ID
registered in the machine. The last letters of the domain name are for the highest level. USA generally uses the
following abbreviation as specified below, and Korea uses .kr to stand for Korea. .com : usually for companies)
/ .edu : usually for educational organizations such as universities. / .ac(academy) is mostly used in Korea / .gov : for
governmental organizations. For example, nasa.gov is for NASA (government) / .mil : military related sites. For
example, af.mil is for USA air force (military)/ .org : private organizations / .au : Australia / .uk : the United Kingdom
/ .ca : Canada / .kr : Korea / .jp : Japan / .fr : France / .tw : Taiwan, etc.
(9) Ethernet
A representative LAN connection system (IEEE 802.3) developed by Xerox, Intel and DEC of America which can
send about 10Mbps and use the packet of 1.5kB. Since Ethernet can allow various types of computers to be
connected as one via the network, it has been called a pronoun of LAN as a universal standard with various
products available, not limited to some specific companies.
(10) FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
An application program used to transfer files between computers among application programs providing TCP/IP
protocol. If an account is allowed to the computer to log in, fast log in the computer is available wherever the
computer is so to copy files.
(11) Gateway
Software/Hardware used to translate for two different protocols to work together, which is equivalent to the
gateway necessary to exchange information with the different system.
(12) Header
Part of the packet including self station number, correspondent station number and error checking area.
(13) HTML
Hypertext Markup Language, standard language of WWW. In other words, it is a language system to prepare
Hypertext documents. The document made of HTML can be viewed through the web browser
(14) HTTP
Hypertext Transfer Protocol, standard protocol of WWW. It is a protocol supporting the hypermedia system.
(15) ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
An extended protocol of IP address used to create error messages and test packets to control the Internet.
(16) IP (Internet Protocol)
Protocol of network layers for the Internet
System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-15

(17) IP Address
Address of respective computers on the Internet made of figures binary of 32 bits (4 bytes) to distinguish the
applicable machine on the Internet. Classified into 2 sections, network distinguishing address and host
distinguishing address. The network address and the host address is respectively divided into class A, B and C
based on the bits allotted. IP address since it shall be unique all over the world, shall be decided not optionally but
as assigned by NIC(Network Information Center) of the applicable district when joining the Internet. In Korea,
KRNIC(Korea Network Information Center) is in charge of this work. Ex.) 165.244.149.190
(18) ISO (International Organization for Standardization)
A subsidiary organization of UN establishing and managing the international standards
(19) LAN (Local Area Network)
Called also as local area communication network or district information communication network, which allows lots
of computers to exchange data with each other as connected though communication cable within a limited area
such as in an office or a building
(20) MAC (Medium Access Control)
A method used to decide which device should use the network during given time on the broadcast network
(21) Node
Each computer connected with the network is called Node
(22) Packet
A package of data which is the basic unit used to send through the network. Usually the package is made of
several tens or hundreds of bytes with the header attached in front to which its destination and other necessary
information are added
(23) PORT number
Used to classify the applications on TCP/UDP.
Ex.) 21/tcp : Telet
(24) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol)
Phone communication protocol which allows packet transmission in connecting with the Internet. In other words,
normal phone cable and modem can be used for the computer to connect through TCP/IP with this most general
Internet protocol.
Similar to SLIP, however with modern communication protocol factors such as error detection and data
compression, it demonstrates more excellent performance than SLIP.
(25) Protocol
Contains regulations related with mutual information transmission method between computers connected with
each other through the network. The protocol may specify detailed interface between machines in Low level (for

System
Chapter 1 Introduction
1-16
example, which bit/byte should go out through the line) or high level of message exchange regulations as files are
transferred through the Internet.
(26) Router
A device used to transfer the data packet between the networks. It sends the data packet to its final destination,
waits if the network is congested, or decides which LAN is good to connect to at the LAN junction. Namely, it is a
special computer/software used to control the two or more networks connected.
(27) Server
The side which passively responds to the client’s request and shares its resources.
(28) TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)
A transport layer protocol for the Internet
- Data Tx/Rx through connection
- Multiplexing
- Transmission reliable
- Emergent data transmission supported
(29) TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
Transmission protocol used for communication among different kinds of computers, which makes the
communication available between general PC and medium host, IBM PC and MAC, and medium or large-sized
different types of computer. It is also used as a general term for information transmission protocol between
computer networks including FTP, Telnet, SMTP, etc. TCP divides data into packets to send through IP and the
packets sent will be united back together through TCP.
(30) Telnet
It means remote login via Internet. To login to remote host via TELNET, account of that host is necessary.
But for some hosts providing public service, you can connect without account

System
Chapter 1 Introduction

1-17

(31) Token Ring
As short-distance network using Token to connect to network having physical ring structure, one of the
Node connection methods at network. If node sending data gets Token, then node gets right to send
message packet. Realistically structured examples are IEEE 802.5, ProNet-1080 and FDDI. Terms called
Token is used as IEEE 802.5
.
(32) UDP(User Datagram Protocol)
A transport layer protocol for the Internet
- High speed communication because of communication without connection
- Multiplexing
- Lower reliability than TCP in transmission (Tough data doesn’t arrive, it doesn’t send data again)
(33) Auto-Negotiation
Fast Ethernet is that Ethernet exchanges information like operation speed, duplex mode.
1. Detect disconnection
2. Decide the specification of network device
3. Change connection speed
(34) FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface)
Based on optical cable, provides 100Mbps, Shared Media Network as Dual Ring method, Token Passing
is done in two-way.
Max 200Km distance for entire network, Max 2Km between Nodes, Max 500 nodes. Generally, this used
as Backbone Network.
(35) Reset
This is function used when you want to initialize the communication module to clear the error
Select [Online]
[Rest] in the XG-PD
If you execute this function, PLC will restart.
Token
Ring
Token passing
Dual Token passing

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-1

Chapter 2 System Congifuration
You can configure various systems by using the XBM ‘H(P)’ Type basic unit and expansion·special communication I/F modules.
This chapter describes how to configure the system through the XGB ‘H(P)’ Type basic unit
2.1 Table of Products Configuration
The available configurations of for the XBM ‘H(P)’ Type PLC system are as below table.

Types Model Description Remark
Main Unit XBM-DN32H2 DC24V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, Transistor output 16 point(sink)
Built-in position 2 axis
H/W : V2.0
O/S:V2.0 or
above
XBM-DN32HP DC24V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, Transistor output 16 point(sink)
Built-in position 6 axis
XBM-DP32H2 DC24V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, Transistor output 16 point(source)
Built-in position 2 axis
XBM-DP32HP DC24V power supply, DC24V input 16 point, Transistor output 16 point(source)
Built-in position 6 axis
Expansion Unit XBE-DC08A DC24V Input 8 point Input
XBE-DC16A/B DC24V Input 16 point
XBE-DC32A DC24V Input 32 point
XBE-RY08A Relay output 8 point Output
XBE-RY08B Relay output 8 point(isolated ouput)
XBE-RY16A Relay output 16 point
XBE-TN08A Transistor output 8 point (sink type)
XBE-TN16A Transistor output 16 point (sink type)
XBE-TN32A Transistor output 32 point (sink type)
XBE-TP08A Transistor output 8 point (source type)
XBE-TP16A Transistor output 16 point (source type)
XBE-TP32A Transistor output 32 point (source type)
XBE-DR16A DC24V Input 8 point, Relay output 8 point In/Output
XBE-DN32A DC24V Input 8 point, Transistor output 16 point (sink type)
Special Module XBF-AD04A Current/Voltage input 4 channel, 1/4000 resolution Analog
ln/Out
XBF-AD04C Current/Voltage input 4 channell, 1/16000 resolution
XBF-AD08A Current/Voltage input 8 channel, 1/4000 resolution
XBF-DC04A Current output 4 channell, 1/4000 resolution
XBF-DC04C Current output 4 channel, High resolutionl, 1/16000 resolution
XBF-DV04A Voltage output 4 channell, 1/4000 resolution
XBF-DV04C Voltage output 4 channel, 1/16000 resolution
XBF-AH04A Current/Voltage input 2 channel, Current/Voltage output 2 channel, 1/4000 resolution
XBF-RD04A RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input 4 channel, Pt100, Jpt100 Temperature
XBF-RD01A RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) input 1 channel, Pt100, Jpt100
XBF-TC04S TC (Thermocouple) input 4 channel
XBF-PD02A Position 2Axis, Line Drive type, Max 2Mpps Positioning
XBF-HD02A High Speed Counter 2 channel, Line Drive Type Counter
XBF-HO02A High Speed Counter 2 channel, Open Collector Type
XBF-TC04RT Temperature controller module (RTD input, 4 roof)
XBF-TC04TT Temperature controller module (TC input, 4 roof)
XBF-PN04B Network position (Open type Ethercat ) 4 Axis
XBF-PN08B Network position (Open type Ethercat ) 8 Axis

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-2

 

XBF-LD02S Loadcell input, insulation type

 

Types Model Description Remark
Communication
Module
XBL-C21A Cnet (RS-232C/Modem) I/F -
XBL-C41A Cnet (RS-422/485) I/F -
XBL-EMTA Enet I/F -
XBL-EIMT/F/H RAPIEnet I/F 2 UTP cable -
XBL-EIPT EtherNet I/P Module -
XBL-CMEA CANopen MasterI/F -
XBL-CSEA CANopen Slave I/F -
XBL-PMEC Profibus-DP, Master -
XBL-PSEA Profibus-DP, Slave
XBL-DSEA DeviceNet, Slave
XBL-RMWA Rnet, Master /F
USB-301A Connection cable (PC to PLC), USB

Notice
LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM CO., LTD. has consistently developed and launched new products.
For new products that are not included to this manual, please contact a nearby exclusive agency.

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-3

2.2 Classification and Type of Product Name
2.2.1 Classification and type of basic unit
Name of basic unit is classified as follows.

Classification Name DC input Relay output Transistor output Power
Main unit XBM-DR16S 8 point 8point None DC24V
XBM-DN16S 8point None 8point
XBM-DN32S 16 point None 16 point
XBM-DN32H 16 point None 16 point
XBM-DN32H2 16 point None 16 point
XBM-DN32HP 16 point None 16 point
XBM-DP32H2 16 point None 16 point
XBM-DP32HP 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR32H 16 point 16 point None AC110V-220V
XBC-DN32H 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR64H 32 point 32 point None
XBC-DN64H 32 point None 32 point
XBC-DN20S(U) 12 point None 8 point
XBC-DN30S(U) 18 point None 12 point
XBC-DN40SU 24 point None 16 point
XBC-DN60SU 36 point None 24 point
XBC-DR20SU 12 point 8 point None
XBC-DR30SU 18 point 12 point None

 

X B M

-

D N 32 H

Relay output (R)
Sink type transistor output (N)
Source type transistor output (P)
No. of I/O point
Standard (S)
Standard with usb loader (SU)
High-end type (H)
H : 2 aixs with APM
H2 : 2axis with XPM
HP : 6aixs with XPM
Ultimate Performance type (U)
XGB PLC Ultimate Analog type (UA)
Module type basic unit (M)
Compact type basic unit(C)
DC input
AC input
MK language supported (B)
IEC language supported (E)

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-4

 

XBC-DR40SU 24 point 16 point None
XBC-DR60SU 36 point 24 point None
XBC-DR10E 6 point 4 point None
XBC-DR14E 8 point 6 point None
XBC-DR20E 12 point 8 point None

 

Classification Name DC input Relay output Transistor output Power
Main unit XBC-DR30E 18 point 12 point None AC110V-220V
XBC-DN10E 6 point None 4 point
XBC-DN14E 8 point None 6 point
XBC-DN20E 12 point None 8 point
XBC-DN30E 18 point None 12 point
XBC-DP10E 6 point None 4 point
XBC-DP14E 8 point None 6 point
XBC-DP20E 12 point None 8 point
XBC-DP30E 18 point None 12 point
XBC-DR40EB 24 point 16 point None
XBC-DR60EB 36 point 24 point None
XBC-DR40EX 24 point 16 point None
XBC-DR60EX 36 point 24 point None
XBC-DN32U 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DP32U 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR28U 16 point 12 point None
XBC-DN32UP 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DP32UP 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR28UP 16 point 12 point None
XBC-DN32UA 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DP32UA 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR28UA 16 point 12 point None
XBC-DN32U/DC 16 point None 16 point DC24V
XBC-DP32U/DC 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR28U/DC 16 point 12 point None
XBC-DN32UP/DC 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DP32UP/DC 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR28UP/DC 16 point 12 point None
XBC-DN32UA/DC 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DP32UA/DC 16 point None 16 point
XBC-DR28UA/DC 16 point 12 point None

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-5

2.2.2 Classification and type of expansion module
Name of expansion module is classified as follows.

Name DC input Relay output Transistor output Reference
XBE-DC08A 8 point None None Input
XBE-DC16A/B 16 point None None
XBE-DC32A 32 point None None
XBE-RY08A/B None 8 point None Relay Output
XBE-RY16A None 16 point None
XBE-TN08A None None 8 point
(sink type)
Sink type Output
XBE-TN16A None None 16 point
(sink type)
XBE-TN32A None None 32 point
(sink type)
XBE-TP08A None None 8 point
(source type)
Source type Output
XBE-TP16A None None 16 point
(source type)
XBE-TP32A None None 32 point
(source type)
XBE-DR16A 8 point 8 point None In/Output
XBE-DN32A 16 point None 16 point
(sink type)

X B E - DC X X A
Relay output(RY)
Transistor output (TN/TP)
Digital input (DC)
Digital input+ sink type transistor output (DN)
Digital input+ source type transistor output (DP)
Digital input+ Relay output
(DR)
XGB series No. of I/O point
I/O expansion module(E)
Expansion special module(F)
Expansion communication
module(L)
Option module(O)

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-6

2.2.3 Classification and type of special module
Special module is classified as follows.

Classification Name No. of input
ch.
Input type No. of output
ch.
Output type
Analog input XBF-AD04A/C 4 Voltage/Current None -
XBF-AD08A 8 Voltage/Current None
Analog output XBF-DC04A/C None - 4 Current
XBF-DV04A/C None - 4 Voltage
Analog In/Output XBF-AH04A 2 Voltage/Current 2 Voltage/Current
RTD input XBF-RD04A 4 PT100/JPT100 None -
XBF-RD01A 1 PT100/JPT100 None -
TC input XBF-TC04S 4 K, J, T, R None -
XBF-TC04RT 4 PT100/JPT100 4 Transister
XBF-TC04TT 4 K, J, T, R 4 Transister
Positioning XBF-PD02A - Line Driver 2 Voltage
XBF-PN04B - Line Driver 4 EtherCAT
XBF-PN08B - Line Driver 8 EtherCAT
High Speed Counter XBF-HD02A 2 Line Driver - Voltage
XBF-HO02A 2 Open Collector - Voltage
Loadcell XBF-LD02A 2 Voltage -

 

X B F

- AD X X A
Analog input (AD)
Analog voltage output (DC)
Analog current output (DV)
Analog inout (AH)
RTD input (RD)
Thermocouple input (TC)
High Speed Counter(HD/HO)
Lindriver Positioning Module(PD)
EtherCAT Positioning Module(PN)
No. of IO point
XGB series
I/O expansion module(E)
Expansion special module(F)
Expansion communication
module(L)
Option module(O)
Non-insulation type (A/C)
Insulation type (S)
RTD input (RT)
TC input(TT)

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-7

2.2.4 Classification and type of communication module
Name of communication module is classified as follows.

Classification Name Type
Cnet Comm. Module XBL-C21A RS-232C, 1 channel
XBL-C41A RS-422/485, 1 channel
FEnet Comm. Module XBL-EMTA Electricity, open type Ethernet
Rnet Comm. Module XBL-RMEA RemoteNet Master
RAPIEnet Comm. Module XBL
EIMT/EIMF/EIMH
Comm. Module between PLCs, electric, optic, and
mixed(electric& optic)
100 Mbps industrial Ethernet supported
EtherNet Comm. Module XBL-EIPT Open EtherNet I/P
CANopen Comm. Module XBL-CMEA CANopen Master
XBL-CSEA CANopen Slave
Pnet Comm. Module XBL-PMEC Profibus-DP Master
XBL-PSEA Profibus-DP Slave
DeviceNet Comm. Module XBL-DSEA DeviceNet Slave

 

X B L - C21A

C21A : Cnet 1 channel (RS-232C)
C41A : Cnet 1 channel (RS-422/485)
EMTA : Fast Ethernet 1chnnel
EIMT/F/H : RAPIEnet 2 Port
(elec. Optic and mixed)
CMEA: CANopen Master
CSEA: CANopen Slave
PMEC: Profibus DP Master
PSEA: Profibus DP Slave
DSEA: DeveiceNet Slave
XGB series
I/O expansion module(E)
Expansion special module(F)
Expansion communication
module(L)
Option module(O)
System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-8

2.3 XBM ‘H(P)’ Type’s System Configuration
2.3.1 How to configure the System
You can configure thesystem by using the XBM ‘H(P)’ Type PLC as below.
You can connect to the expansion modules up to 7EA.

Items Description
Number of I/O configuration points XBM-DN32H : 32 points~256 points
XBM-DN32H2 : 32 points~256 points
XBM-DN32HP : 32 points~256 points
XBM-DP32H2 : 32 points~256 points
XBM-DP32HP : 32 points~256 points
Number of
accessible
expansion
modules
Digital I/O
module
Up to 7 EA
Special module Up to 7 EA
Communication module Up to 2 EA
High speed expansion
module
Up to 2 EA (Can be expanded for2 slots just behind the basic unit)
Option module Cannot be installed.
Configuration of products Main
Unit
XBM series XBM-DN16S
XBM-DN32H
XBM-DP32H2
XBM-DR16S
XBM-DN32H2
XBM-DP32HP
XBM-DN32S
XBM-DN32HP
Expansion module Digital I/O
module
XBE-DC08/16/32A
XBE-DC16B
XBE-DR16A
XBE-TN08/16/32A
XBE-TP08/16/32A
XBE-DN32A
XBE-RY08/16A
XBE-RY08B
Special module XBF-AD04A
XBF-AD04C
XBF-AD08A
XBF-AH04A
XBF-DC04A
XBF-DC04C
XBF-DV04A
XBF-DV04C
XBF-HO02A
XBF-HD02A
XBF-TC04RT
XBF-TC04TT
XBF-RD04A
XBF-RD01A
XBF-TC04S
XBF-PD02A
XBF-LD02S
Communication module XBL-C41A
XBL-EMTA
XBL-PMEC
XBL-RMEA
XBL-C21A
XBL-EIMT/F/H
XBL-EIPT
XBL-PSEA
XBL-CMEA/CSEA
XBL-DSEA
High speed I/F module XBF-PN04B XBF-PN08B

Basic unit I/O module Special module Communication
System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-9

2.3.2 Instructions for System Configuration
(1) high speed expansion I/F module
XBM ‘H(P)’ Type PLC supports the high speed expansion I/F to enhance the expansion module processing
speed. This section describes the instructions to configure the system by using the high speed expansion I/F
modules and the existing expansion modules.
- The existing XGB expansion· communication· special modules can be commonly used and the high speed
expansion I/F module that cannot be supported by the XGB basic unit are available.
- In the case of expansion communication modules, a total of 4 expansion communication modules can be
mounted in the order of installation; 2EA of high speed I/F communication modules, 2EA of the existing
communication I/F modules.
- In the case of the high speed expansion module, it acts as the high speed expansion I/O only when it is
installed in 1-stage or 2-stage.
- When more than two high speed expansion modules are installed, only the modules mounted in 1-stage, 2-
stage act as the high speed I/F; for the modules mounted in 3-stage or more, they work equally to the existing
expansion modules or do not work depending on the corresponding modules.
- The high speed expansion I/F modules cannot be installed behind the normal expansion modules. Accordingly,
when using the high speed expansion modules and the existing normal expansion modules by mixture, the
existing ones should be installed behind the high speed ones.
- The below table represents the example of the system configuration using the high speed expansion modules
and the existing normal expansion modules.
(: High speed expansion communication modules, ○: Existing communication modules,
: High speed expansion special, I/O modules, : Existing special, I/O modules)

Basic Unit Expansion modules Definitions of Operations Remarks
1-stage 2-stage 3-stage 4-stage 5-stage
XBM ‘H(P)’
Type
1,2-stage : Using the high speed I/F, 3~5-
stage : Using the existing I/F
3 communication
modules works
1,2-stage : Using the high speed I/F, 3~5-
stage : Using the existing I/F
4 communication
modules works
1-stage : Using the high speed I/F, 2~5-
stage : Using the existing I/F
2 communication
modules works
System Configuration is impossible.
(The high speed expansion modules
cannot be applied to the further stage of
the existing expansion modules)
1,2 -stage : Using the high speed I/F,
3~5-stage : Using the existing I/F
3 communication
modules works
Using 10-stage of the existing expansion
modules
Existing XGB 1~5-stage: Operated by the existing I/F 2 communication
modules works
2 communication
modules works
System Configuration is impossible. (The
number of communication modules is
exceeded)
System Configuration is impossible. (The
high speed expansion modules cannot
be applied to the further stage of the
existing expansion modules)

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-10

(2) How to allocate slots for expansion modules
-In the case of the XBM ‘H(P)’, built-in Ethernet occupies No.1 slot. Accordingly, No.2 slot is allocated for the first
expansion module.
-In the case of the XBM ’H(P)’ type, empty slot is allocated for No.1.
0~1 slot 2 slot

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-11

2.3.3 Embedded Communication System Configuration
2.3.3.1 Embedded Cnet I/F System Configuration
The Cnet I/F system is the system to transmit·receive external devices including PC and data through RS-232C/RS-
422 I/F. In the case of Built-in Cnet, RS-232C and RS-485 communication I/F are respectively embedded. Moreover,
you can additionally install the Cnet I/F module (XBL-C21A) for RS-232C only that is the expansion module and
Cnet I/F module (XBL-C41A) for 485 only so it is possible to build up various communication systems for the
purposes.
Some examples of communication systems are represented here, which can be configured by the Cnet I/F
embedded in XGB basic unit.
(1)
1:1 connection with the HMI by using the basic unit’s embedded RS-232C or RS-485 port
(2) Communication with the other PLC through the basic unit’s embedded RS-485 port/ 1:1 connection with the HMI
through the embedded RS-232C port

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-12

(3) Configuring 1:N communication system with the maximum 32 stations by using the basic unit’s embedded RS-
485port
Notice
For detailed specificaitons of the embedded Cnet communication, refer to Part4 Communication in this manual.
For detailed specificaitons of the expansion Cnet communication module, refer to “XGB Cnet I/F” manual.

System
Chapter 2 System Configuration

2-13

2.3.3.2 Embedded Ethernet I/F System Configuration
The Ethernet is the typical LAN interface (IEEE802.3) developed commonly by Xerox, Intel, DEC of U.S.A. It is the
network connection system with the transfer capacity of 100Mbps and packets of 1.5kB. The Ethernet can integrate
different types of computers through network so it is regarded as the representative LAN interface. It is not the standard
for a specific company but the common standard so you can find various products. In addition, it can control
communication through CSMA/CD and builds up the network easily, furthermore, can collect high-capacity data.
(1) Ethernet system’s block diagram
Notice
For more details on how to the above LSIS’s network system configuration and Enet system configuration, refer to
Chap.5 Embedded Communication and “XGB FEnet I/F ” of this manual.

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-1

Chapter 3 Specifications
3.1 Names and Functions of Each Part

No Names Purposes
LED for displaying input, output ■ Displays the On/Off status of input, output contacts
Input connector ■ Terminal block receiving the actual input signal
Output connector ■ Terminal block outputting the actual output signal
Built-in serial communication
connecting connector
■ Built-in RS-232C/485 connecting connector
Built-in ethernet
connecting connector
■ Built-in Enet connecting connector
PADT connecting connector ■ PADT connecting connector
RUN/STOP mode switch ■ Sets the basic unit’s operation mode.
• STOP → RUN : Program’s operation is executed.
• RUN → STOP : Program’s operation is stopped.
(In case of STOP, the remote operation is available.)
Status display LED ■ Displays the basic unit’s operation status.
• PWR(Red light On) : The power is supplied.
• RUN(Green light On) : During RUN mode
• ERR(Flickering red light) : Occurrence of errors during operation

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-2

 

① ②
No Names Purposes
Power terminal Power supply terminal (DC24V)
Expansion module hook Fix hook when installing extension module
Terminating resistance selector
switch
Terminating resistance selector switch for built-in RS-485
Switch 2ea On : Use of Terminating resistance
Switch 2ea Off : Not use of Terminating resistance

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-3

3.2 General specifications

No. Items Specification Reference
1 Ambient Temp. 0 ~ 55C -
2 Storage Temp. 25 ~70C
3 Ambient humidity 5~ 95%RH (Non-condensing)
4 Storage humidity 5 ~95%RH (Non-condensing)
5 Vibration Occasional vibration -
Frequency Acceleration Pulse width Times IEC61131-2
5≤f< 8.4 3.5mm 10 times
each
direction
(X,Y and Z)
8.4≤f≤150 9.8m/s2(1G)
Continuous vibration
Frequency Acceleration Pulse width
5≤f< 8.4 1.75mm
8.4≤f≤150 4.9m/s2(0.5G)
6 Shocks Peak acceleration : 147 m/s2(15G)
Duration : 11ms
Pulse wave type : Half-sine (3 times eachdirection per each axis)
7 Impulse noise Square wave
impulse noise
AC:1,500 V
DC:
900 V
LSIS standard
Electrostatic
discharge
Voltage: 4kV (Contact discharge) IEC61000-4-2 IEC61131-2
Radiated
electromagnetic
field noise
80 ~ 1,000MHz, 10 V/m IEC61131-2,
IEC61000-4-3
Fast transient
/Burst noise
Classifi
cation
Power
supply
Digital/Analog Input/Output,
Communication Interface
IEC61131-2
IEC61000-4-4
Voltage 2kV 1kV
8 Operation
ambience
Free from corrosive gases and excessive dust -
9 Altitude Less than 2,000m
10 Pollution degree Less than 2
11 Cooling method Air-cooling

 

1) IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
: An international civil community that promotes international cooperation for standardization of electric/ electro
technology, publishes international standard and operates suitability assessment system related to the above.
2) Pollution Degree
: An index to indicate the pollution degree of used environment that determines the insulation performance of the
device. For example, pollution degree 2 means the state to occur the pollution of non-electric conductivity
generally, but the state to occur temporary electric conduction according to the formation of dew.
Notes

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-4

3.3 Power specifications
This section describes XBM ‘H(P)’ PLC basic unit’s power specifications.

Items Specification condition
Input Input volatage range DC20.4~28.8V(-15%, + 20%) -15%, + 20% of rated voltage
Rated input voltage DC24V
Input current 1A or less Input max +DC28.8V load
Inrush current 70 Apeak or less Input max +DC28.8V load
Efficiency 60% or more Input max +DC28.8V load
Permitted momentary
power failure
1ms or less Input max +DC28.8V load
Ouput Rated output voltage DC 5V(±2%)
Output current 2.0A
Power supply status indication LED On when power supply is normal
Cable specification 0.75 ~ 2 mm2

* For protection of the power supply, you are recommended to use the power supply with the maximum of 4A fuse.
Notice
(1) Allowable instantaneous interruption time
It is the time to maintain the normal output voltage(normal operation) on the condition that the input voltage(DC24V) is
lower than the lowest rated input voltage (DC20.4V).
(2) Use UL certified power supply
- Device, Power supply, shouldmeet Class 2 or LVLC(Limited voltage Limited circuit).

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-5

3.3.1 Consumption current

Type Model Consumption current (Unit : )
Main unit XBM-DN32H2 540
XBM-DN32HP 540
XBM-DP32H2 540
XBM-DP32HP 540
Expansion I/O module XBE-DC32A 50
XBE-DC16A/B 40
XBE-DC08A 20
XBE-RY16A 440
XBE-RY08A/B 240
XBE-TN32/16/08A 80/50/40
XBE-DR16A 250
XBE-TP32/16/08A 80/50/40
Expansion Special module XBF-AD04A 120
XBF-AD08A 105
XBF-AH04A 120
XBF-DV04A 110
XBF-DC04A 110
XBF-RD04A 100
XBF-RD01A 100
XBF-TC04S 100
XBF-PD02A 500
XBF-HO02A 270
XBF-HD02A 330
XBF-AD04C 105
XBF-DC04C 70
XBF-DV04C 70
XBF-TC04RT 120
XBF-TC04TT 120
XBF-LD02S 110
Expansion Communication module XBL-C21A 110
XBL-C41A 110
XBL-EMTA 190
XBL-EIMT/F/H 280/670/480
XBL-EIPT 400
XBL-CMEA 150
XBL-CSEA 150
XBL-PMEC 300
XBL-PSEA 230
XBL-DSEA 100
XBL-RMEA 250

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-6

3.3.2 Calculation Example of Consumption Current/Voltage
Calculate the consumption current and configure the system not to exceed the output current capacity of main unit.
Refer to 3.3.1 for each module’s consumption current
(1) XGB PLC configuration example 1
Consumption of current/voltage is calculated as follows.

Type Model Unit No. Internal 5V
consumption
current
(Unit : )
Remark
Main unit XBM-DN32HP 1 540 In case all contact points are On.
(Maximum consumption current)
Expansion module XBE-DC32A 2 50
XBE-TN32A 2 80
XBF-AD04A 1 120 All channel is used.
(Maximum consumption current)
XBF-DC04A 1 110
XBL-C21A 1 110
Consumption
current
1140mA -
Consumption
voltage
5.7W 1.14A 5V = 5.7W

In case system is configured as above, since 5V consumption current is total 1,140 mA and 5V output of main unit is maximum
2A, normal system configuration is available.
(2) XGB PLC configuration example 2

Type Model Unit No. Internal 5V
consumption
current
(Unit : )
Remark
Main unit XBM-DN32HP 1 540 In case all contact points are On.
(Maximum consumption current)
Expansion module XBE-DR16A 2 250
XBE-RY16A 2 440
XBF-AD04A 2 120 All channel is used.
(Maximum consumption current)
XBL-C21A 1 110
Consumption
current
2,150mA -
Consumption
voltage
10.75W 2.15 * 5V = 10.75W

In case system is configured as above, since 5V consumption current is total 2,150 mA and 5V output of XGB 32 points main unit
is maximum 2A, configuration is not available. This total consumption current is calculated when all input/output points are on.
For safety for system, it is recommened to use higher specification of main unit.

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-7

3.4 Battery
3.4.1 Battery specifications

Items Specifications
Nominal voltage / current DC 3.0V / 6.5 mAh
Warranty term 3 years(at room temperature)
Purpose RTC operation during the blackout
Charging time
Backup time About 6 months(25)
surrounding
temperature
Back-up time
70 about 195 days
25 about 183 days
-25 about 133 days

3.4.2 Instruction for Use
(1) It is impossible to exchange inner battery
(2) Do not apply heat or solder electrode (It may cause a battery’s life-shortening)
(3) Do not measure voltage with a tester or short-circuit (It may be the cause of a fire.)
(4) Do not disassemble the battery.
(5) Do not change the battery on purpose.
3.4.3 Battery Life
Battery’s life may be different depending on the conditions of blackout time, service temperature, etc.
Battery can be charged when power is on, and be used for RTC function.
Battery can be discharged when PLC power have been off for a long time. When you put power on PLC, it will be
charged automatically. Program and data backup should be preserved with no regard to battery discharge.

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-8

3.5 Performance specifications
The XBM-DN32H2/P unit’s common performance specifications for CPU are as below.

Items Specifications Remark
XBM-DN32H2/XBM-DN32HP, XBM-DP32H2/XBM-DP32HP
Program control metho Cyclic execution of stored program, Time-driven interrupt,
Process-driven interrupt
I/O control method Batch processing by simultaneous scan (Refresh method),
Directed by program instruction
Program language LD(Ladder Diagram), Instruction List, SFC (Sequential Function Chart)
ST (Structured Text)
Number of
instructions
Basic 28
Application 677
Processing speed
(Basic instruction)
40ns/step
Program capacity 64kStep
Max. I/O points 256 points (Main + Expansion 7 stages)
Data area P P0000 ~ P2047F (32,768 points) Input/Ouput
M M0000 ~ M2047F (32,768 points)
K K0000 ~ K4095F (65,536 points)
L L0000 ~ L4095F (65,536 points) Link
F F0000 ~ F2047F (32,768 points)
T 100, 10, 1: T0000 ~ T2047 (set by parameter) Timer
C C0000 ~ C2047 Counter
S S00.00 ~ S127.99 Step
D D0000 ~ D32767 Data register
U U0.0 ~ U08.31 Analog Data
Z Z000 ~ Z127 (128word)
N N0000 ~ N10239 (10,240 word)
File resister R RAM area 8block (R00000 ~ R32,767)
Total program 256
Initial
task
Initial task 1
Cyclic task Max 16
I/O task Max 8
Internal device
task
Max 16
High Speed
Counter task
Max 4
Positioning task 1
Operation mode RUN, STOP, DEBUG
Self-diagnosis function Detects errors of scan time, memory, I/O and power supply
Program port USB 1 channel
Back-up method Latch area setting in basic parameter
Internal consumption
current
540mA
Weight 134g

System
Chapter 3 Specifications

3-9

 

Items Specifications Remark
XBM-DN32H2/XBM-DN32HP, XBM-DP32H2/XBM-DP32HP
Built-in Function PID control Control by instruction, auto-tuning,
PWM output, Forced output,
Operation scan time setting,Antiwindup, Delta MV, SV lamp,
Hybrid operation, Cascade operation
Cnet PID control Dedicated protocol(XGT)
Modbus protocol
User defined protocol ,
LS bus(inverter protocol)
Channel RS-232C 1 port and RS-485 1 port
Enet Transfer spec Cable: 100Base-TX, Speed: 100Mbps, Auto-MDIX*1, IEEE 802.3
Topology Star
Diagnosis Module information, Service condition
Protocol XGT dedicated, Modbus TCP/IP, user define frame
Service P2P, High Speed link, Remote connection,SMTP,SNTP, Auto scan
High
Speed
Counter
Performance 1 phase: 200㎑(2 phase: 100㎑)
channels 1phase 4 channels, 2 phase 2 channels
Counter mode 4 counter modes are supported based on input pulse and INC/DEC
method
1 pulse operation Mode : INC/DEC count by program
1 pulse operation Mode : INC/DEC count by phase B pulse input
2 pulse operation Mode : INC/DEC count by input pulse
2 pulse operation Mode : INC/DEC count by difference of phase
Function Internal/external preset • Latch counter
Compare output • No. of rotation per unit time
Position Basic function No. of control axis: 6axis(XBMH: 2 axis)
Control method : Position control, Speed control, Speed/Position control,
Position/Speed control
Control Unit: Pulse, mm, inch, degree
Position data: 400 steps for each axis(1~400)
Operation mode: end, keep, continuous
Operation method: single, repeat
Interpolation
function
▪ 2/3/4/5/6 axis linear interpolation(XBMH: 2 axis linear interpolation )
▪2 axis circular interpolation
▪3 axis helical interpolation( not supported in XBMH)
Position Absolute method / Incremental method
Position address range: -2,147,483,648
2,147,483,647(Pulse)
Speed: max. 200kpps
Acc/dec processing: Trapezoid-shaped , S-curve
Origin return
method
DOG + HOME (Off), DOG + HOME(On),
Upper/Lower limit + HOME, DOG, High speed, Upper/Lower limit, HOME
Jog operation Jog Operation, MPG Operation, Inching Operation
Pulse catch 104point(P0000 ~ P0003), 504point(P0004 ~ P0007)
External point Interrupt 104point(P0000 ~ P0003), 504point(P0004 ~ P0007)
Input filter 1,3,5,10,20,70,100

*1 Auto-MDIX(Automatic medium-dependent interface crossover) : It is the function to automatically detect whether the cable connected
to the Ethernet port is peer-to-peer(straight) or cross cable

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-1

Chapter 4 Installation and wiring
4.1 Parameter & Operation data
Please design protection circuit at the external of PLC for entire system to operate safely because an abnormal
output or an malfunction may cause accident when any error of external power or malfunction of PLC module.
(1) It should be installed at the external side of PLC to emergency stop circuit, protection circuit, interlock circuit of
opposition action such as forward /reverse operation and interlock circuit for protecting machine damage such as
upper/lower limit of positioning.
(2) If PLC detects the following error, all operation stops and all output is off.
(Available to hold output according to parameter setting)
(a) When over current protection equipment or over voltage protection operates
(b) When self diagnosis function error such as WDT error in PLC CPU occurs
When error about IO control part that is not detected by PLC CPU, all output is off.
Design Fail Safe circuit at the external of PLC for machine to operate safely. Refer to 4.1.1 Fail Safe circuit.
(1) Because of error of output device, Relay, TR, etc., output may not be normal. About output signal that may cause
the heavy accident, design supervisory circuit to external.
When load current is more than rating or over current by load short flows continuously, danger of heat, fire may occur
so design safety circuit to external such as fuse.
Design for external power supply to be done first after PLC power supply is done. If external power supply is done
first, it may cause accident by misoutput, misoperation.
In case communication error occurs, for operation status of each station, refer to each communication manual.
In case of controlling the PLC while peripheral is connected to CPU module, configure the interlock circuit for system
to operate safely. During operation, in case of executing program change, operation status change, familiarize the
manual and check the safety status. Especially, in case of controlling long distance PLC, user may not response to
error of PLC promptly because of communication error or etc.
Limit how to take action in case of data communication error between PLC CPU and external device adding installing
interlock circuit at the PLC program.
Danger
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-2

Don’t close the control line or communication cable to main circuit or power line. Distance should be more than 100mm.
It may cause malfunction by noise.
In case of controlling lamp load, heater, solenoid valve, etc. in case of Off -> On, large current (10 times of normal
current) may flows, so consider changing the module to module that has margin at rated current.
Process output may not work properly according to difference of delay of PLC main power and external power for
process (especially DC in case of PLC power On-Off and of start time.
For example, in case of turning on PLC main power after supplying external power for process, DC output module may
malfunction when PLC is on, so configure the circuit to turn on the PLC main power first
Or in case of external power error or PLC error, it may cause the malfunction.
Not to lead above error to entire system, part causing breakdown of machine or accident should be configured at the
external of PLC
Danger
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-3 (5) Output device runs by program through magnetic contactor (MC) [On]

4.1.1 fail safe circuit
(1) example of system design (When ERR contact point of power module is not used)
In case of AC In case of AC . DC
Check direct
current
Signal input
Timer setting
which DC input
signal is
configured.
Voltage relay
equipped
Output for warning
(Lamp or buzzer)
RUN by F009C
Power off to output
device
Output for warning
(Lamp or buzzer)
Power Off to
output device
Configure part that lead
opposite operation or
breakdown such as
interlock circuit forward,
reverse revolution by
external interlock circuit
(Emergency stop,
stop by limit
switch)
Emergency stop,
Stop by limit
Start sequence of power. In case of AC
(1) Turn on power
(2) Run CPU.
(3) Turn on start switch
(4) Output device runs by program through
magnetic contactor (MC) [On]
Start sequence of power. In case of AC DC
(1) Run CPU after power is on
(2) Turn on RA2 as DC power on
(3) Turn on timer after DC power is stable.
(4) Turn on start switch
F0045
Pm
Pm
Pm
F009C
Pm
Pm
Tm
Pm
PLC RUN output
Start available as RA1
Run by F009C
Trans
Fuse
Start
switch
Stop
SW Input module
Program
Output module
Output module
Output module
Output module
Start Program
switch
Stop
SW
Trans
Fuse
Trans
Fuse
Fuse
DC power
Power
Power
Pn
Pm
F009C
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-4

(2) Fail Safe Measures in case of PLCfailures
Failures of the PLC CPU and memory are detected by self-diagnosis but if there are some problems with I/O control part,
etc, the failure may not be detected from the CPU. In this case, it can be different depending on the failure status, all
contacts may be On or Off so normal operation or safety of the controlled subject cannot be guaranteed.
We have done our best to assure quality but in case there are some problems with the PLC, please configure the fail safe
circuit on the outside to prevent damage of the equipment or accident due to some cause. The below is the example of
system configuration with the fail sage circuit.
<System example>
* Equip output module for fail safe to last slot of system.
[Fail safe circuit example]
Since P200 turn on/off every 0.5s, use TR output.

F0093
P200
P200
P201
~
24V
0V
P20F
MC
T2
External load
Off delay timer
P200
0.5s 0.5s
T1 T2
MC
- +
DC24V
CPU unit Output module

T1
L L
On delay timer

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-5

4.1.2 PLC heat calculation
(1) Power consumption of each part
(a) Power consumption of module
The power conversion efficiency of power module is about 70% and the other 30% is gone with heat; 3/7 of the output power
is the pure power consumption. Therefore, the calculation is as follows.
Wpw = 3/7 {(I5VX 5) + (I24V X 24)} (W)
I
5V : power consumption of each module DC5V circuit(internal current consumption)
I
24V: the average current consumption of DC24V used for output module
(current consumption of simultaneous On point)
If DC24V is externally supplied or a power module without DC24V is used, it is not applicable.
(b) Sum of DC5V circuit current consumption
The DC5V output circuit power of the power module is the sum of power consumption used by each module.
W5V = I5VX 5 (W)
(c) DC24V average power consumption(power consumption of simultaneous On point)
The DC24V output circuit’s average power of the power module is the sum of power consumption used by each module.
W24V = I24V X 24 (W)
(d) Average power consumption by output voltage drop of the output module(power consumption of simultaneous On point)
Wout = Iout X Vdrop X output point X simultaneous On rate (W)
I
out : output current (actually used current) (A)
V
drop: voltage drop of each output module (V)
Main unit
input

constant
Voltage
transforme
r

AC power
100V~240V
Comm. Comm. output input Special
DC5V
DC24V
load
Iout Iin
I5V
I24V
AC power
DC 100V~240V
power
24V

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-6

(e) Input average power consumption of input module
(power consumption of simultaneous On point)
Win = linX E X input point X simultaneous On rate (W)
I
in: input current (root mean square value in case of AC) (A)
E : input voltage (actually used voltage) (V)
(f) Power consumption of special module power assembly
WS = I5V X 5 + I24V X 24 + I100V X 100 (W)
The sum of power consumption calculated by each block is the power consumption of the entire PLC system.
W = WPW + W5V + W24V+ Wout + Win + Ws(W)
Calculate the heats according to the entire power consumption(W) and review the temperature increase within the control
panel.
The calculation of temperature rise within the control panel is displayed as follows.
T = W / UA [
°C]
W : power consumption of the entire PLC system (the above calculated value)
A : surface area of control panel[m
2]
U : if equalizing the temperature of the control panel by using a fan and others : 6
If the air inside the panel is not ventilated : 4
If installing the PLC in an air-tight control panel, it needs heat-protective(control) design considering the heat from the PLC as well
as other devices. If ventilating by vent or fan, inflow of dust or gas may affect the performance of the PLC system.
2 기본 파라미
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-7

4.2 Attachment/Detachment of Modules
Here describes about basic parameter of embedded positioning.
4.2.1 Attachment/Detachment of modules
Caution in handling
Use PLC in the range of general specification specified by manual.
In case of usage out of range, it may cause electric shock, fire, malfunction, damage of product.
Module must be mounted to hook for fixation properly before its fixation.
The module may be damaged from over-applied force. If module is not mounted properly, it may cause malfunction.
Do not drop or impact the module case, terminal block connector.
Do notseparate PCB from case.
(1) Equipment of module
Eliminate the Extension Cover at the product.
Push the product and connect it in agreement with Hook For Fixation of four edges and Hook For Connection at the bottom.
After connection, push down the Hook For Fixation and fix it completely.
(2) Detachment of module
Push up the Hook For Disconnection, and then detach the product with two hands.
(Do not detach the product by force)
When separating module, do not apply excessive force. If so, hook may be damaged.
-If used outside the range, electric shock, fire, malfunction, or damage to the product may cause damage.
Remark
Remark

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-8

(3) Installation of module
XGB PLC has a hook for DIN rail (rail width: 35mm) so that cab be installed at DIN rail.
(a) In case of installing at DIN rail
Pull the hook as shown below for DIN rail at the bottom of module and install it at DIN rail
Push the hook to fix the module at DIN rail after installing module at DIN rail
(b) In case of installing at panel
You can install XGB compact type main unit onto a panel directly using screw hole
Use M4 type screw to install the product onto a panel.
2-Ø4.5 screw hole
Panel
HOOK for DIN rail

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-9

(4) Module equipment location
Keep the following distance between module and structure or partfor ventilation, easy detachment and attachment.
*1 : In case height of wiring duct is less than 50 mm (except this 40mm or more)
*2 : In case of equipping cable without removing near module, 20mm or more
*3 : In case of connector type, 20mm or above
Panel
PLC
20

or above*3

30or above*1
30or above*1

5or above*1 5

or above
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-10

(5) Module equipment direction
(a) For easyventilation, install as shown below.
(b) Don’t install as shown below.

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-11

(6) Distance with other device
To avoid radiation noise or heat, keep the distance between PLC and device (connector and relay) as far as the following figure.
Device installed in front of PLC: 100
or more
Device installed beside PLC: 50
or more
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-12

4.2.2 Caution in handling
Here describes cautionfrom open to install
Don’t drop or impact product.
Don’t disassemble the PCB from case. It may cause an error.
In case of wiring, makesure foreign substance not to enter upper part of module. If it enters, eliminate it.
(1) Caution in handling IO module
It describes caution in handling IO module.
(a) Recheck of IO module specification
For input module, be cautious about input voltage, for output module, if voltage that exceeds the max. open/close voltage is
induced, it may cause the malfunction, breakdown or fire.
(b) Used wire
When selecting wire, consider ambient temp, allowed current and minimum size of wire is AWG22(0.3mm
2) or above.
(c) Environment
In case of wiring IO module, if device or material that induce high heat is too close or oil contacts wire too long time, it may
cause short, malfunction or error.
(d) Polarity
Before supplying power of module which has terminal block, check the polarity.
(e)Wiring
In case of wiring IO with high voltage line or power line, induced obstacle may cause error.
Let no cable pass the IO operation indication part (LED).
(You can’t discriminate the IO indication.)
In case induced load is connected with output module, connect the surge killer or diode load in parallel. Connect cathode of
diode to + side of power.
(f) Terminal block
Check close adhesion status. Let no foreign material enter into PLC when wring terminal block or processing screw hole as it
may cause malfunction, it may cause malfunction.
(g) Don’t impact IO module or don’t disassemble the PCB from case.
OUT
COM
Output module
Induced load
Surge killer
OUT
COM
Output module
Induced load
Diode
+ -
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-13

4.3 Wire
In case using system, it describes caution about wiring.
When wiring, cut off the external power.
If all power is cut, it may cause electric shock or damage of product.
In case of flowing electric or testing after wiring, equip terminal cover included in product. It not, it may cause electric shock.
Do D type ground (type 3 ground) or above dedicated for PLC for FG and LG terminal. It may cause electric shock or
malfunction.
When wiring module, check the rated voltage and terminal array and do properly.
If rating is different, it may cause fire, malfunction.
For external connecting connector, use designated device and solder.
If connecting is not safe, it may cause short, fire, malfunction.
For screwing, use designated torque range. If it is not fit, it may cause short, fire, malfunction.
Let no foreign material enter such as garbage or disconnection part into module. It may cause fire, malfunction, error.
4.3.1 Power wiring
(1) AC110V/AC220V/DC24V cables should be compactly twisted andconnected in the shortest distance
(2)DC Power supply capacity should be 1A or more
Remark
Danger

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-14

(3) Isolate the PLC power, I/O devices and power devices as follows.
(4) AC110V/AC220V cable should be as thick as possible(2mm
2) to reduce voltage drop
(5) AC110V/ DC24V cables should not be installed close to main circuit cable(high voltage/high current) and I/O signal cable.They
should be 100mm away from such cables
(6)When noise may be intruded inside it, use an insulated shielding transformer or noise filter.
(7) To prevent surge from lightning, use the lightning surge absorber as presented below.
(8)Wiring of each input power should be twisted as short as possible and the wiring of shielding transformer or noise filtershould not
be arranged via a duct.

Remark
(1) Isolate the grounding(E1) of lightning surge absorber from the grounding(E2) of the PLC.
(2) Select a lightning surge absorber type so that the max. voltage may not the specified allowable voltage
of the absorber.

 

E2
PLC
I/O device
E1

Surge absorber to prevent lighting
System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-15

4.3.2 I/O Device wiring
(1) The size of I/O device cable is limited to0.3~2 mm2 but it is recommended to select a size(0.3 mm2) to useconveniently.
(2) Please isolate input signal line from output signal line.
(3) I/O signal lines should be wired 100mm and more away from high voltage/high current main circuit cable.
(4) Batch shield cable should be used and the PLC side should be grounded unless the main circuit cable and power cable can not
be isolated.
(5)When applying pipe-wiring, make sure to firmly ground the piping.

Input
Output
RA

PLC Shield cable
DC

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-16

(6) Example of input module.
(7) Example of output module.

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-17

 

Notes
1) For reducing noise and improving system safety, add Dummyresistor to increase load current
DC12/24V
PLC Dummy
resistor
Load
DC24V
P20
P2B
P
OUT
COM
When using Positioning instruction, out current shouldbe 10mA~100mA

List Description
Load Voltage DC12V / DC24V
Range of Load current 10mA ~100mA
Output frequency 200kpps or below

System
Chapter 4 Installation and wiring

4-18

4.3.3 Grounding wiring
(1) The PLC contains a proper noise measure, so it can be used without any separate grounding if there is a large noise. However, if
grounding is required, please refer to the followings.
(2) For grounding, please make sure to use the exclusive grounding.
For grounding construction, apply type 3 grounding(grounding resistance lower than 100
)
(3) If the exclusive grounding is not possible, use the common grounding as presented in B) of the figure below.
A) Exclusive grounding : best B)common grounding : good C) common grounding: defective
(4) Use the grounding cable more than 2 mm
2. To shorten the length of the grounding cable, place the grounding point as close to
the PLC as possible.
(5) If any malfunction from grounding is detected, separate the FG of the base from the grounding.
4.3.4 Specifications of wiring cable
The specifications of cable used for wiring are as follows.

Types of external
connection
Cable specification (mm2)
Lower limit Upper limit
Digital input 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Digital output 0.18 (AWG24) 2.0 (AWG14)
Analog I/O 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Communication 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Main power 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)
Protective grounding 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)

 

PLC

 

Other devices

 

PLC

 

Other devices

 

PLC Other devices

Type 3 Grounding Type 3 Grounding
System
Chapter 5 Maintenance

5-1

Chapter 5 Maintenance
Be sure to perform daily and periodic maintenance and inspection in order to maintain the PLC in the best conditions.
5.1 Maintenance and Inspection
The I/O module mainly consist of semiconductor devices and its service life is semi-permanent. However, periodic inspection is
requested for ambient environment may cause damage to the devices. When inspecting one or two times per six months, check
the following items.

Check Items Judgment Corrective Actions
Change rate of input voltage Within change rate of input
voltage
Hold it with the allowable range.
Power supply for input/output Input/Output specification of each
module
Hold it with the allowable rangeof each module.
Ambient
environment
Temperature 0 ~ + 55 Adjust theoperating temperature and humiditywith the defined
range.
Humidity 5 ~ 95%RH
Vibration No vibration Use vibration resisting rubber or thevibrationprevention
method.
Play of modules No play allowed Securely enrage the hook.
Connecting conditions of
terminal screws
No loose allowed Retighten terminal screws.
Spare parts Check the number of
Spare parts and their
Store conditions
Cover the shortage and improve theconditions.

5.2 Daily Inspection
The following table shows the inspection and items which are to be checked daily.

Check Items Check Points Judgment Corrective
Actions
PLC Panel Attachment
Status
Check the loosening of mounting screws Must be securely attached Retighten
Screws.
Connection conditions of
Input/Output module
Check Hook for fixation Placed in CLOSE Retighten
Screws.
Connecting conditions of
terminal block or extension
cable
Check for loose mounting screws. Screws should not be loose. Retighten
Screws.
Check the distance between solderless
terminals.
Proper clearance should be
provided.
Correct.
Connecting of expansion cable. Connector should not be loose. Correct.
LED
indicator
PWR LED Check that the LED is On. On(Offindicates an error)
Run LED Check that the LED is Onduring Run. On (flickering or Off indicates an
error)
ERR LED Check that the LED is Offduring Run. Flickeringindicates an error
Input LED Check that the LEDturns Onand Off. Onwhen input is On,
Off when input is off.
Output LED Check that the LEDturns Onand Off Onwhenoutputis On,
Off when output is off

System
Chapter 5 Maintenance

5-2

5.3 Periodic Inspection
Check the following items once or twice every six months, and perform corrective actions as needed.

Check Items Checking Methods Judgment Corrective Actions
Ambient
environment
Ambient
temperature
-. Measure with thermometer and
hygrometer
-. measure corrosive gas
0 ~ 55°C Adjust to general
standard
(Internal environmental
standard of control
section)
Ambient Humidity 5 ~ 95%RH
Ambient pollution
level
There should be no
corrosivegases
PLC
Conditions
Looseness,
Ingress
Move each modiule The module should be
mounted securely.
Retighten screws
dust or foreign
material
Visual check No dust or foreign material
Connecting
conditions
Loose terminal
screws
Re-tightenscrews Screws should not be loose Retighten
Distance between
terminals
Visual check Proper clearance Correct
Loose connectors Visual check Connectors should not be
loose.
Retighten connector
mounting
screws
Line voltage check Measure voltage between
input terminals
3.3 Power specifications Change supply power

System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-1

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
The following explains contents, diagnosis and corrective actions for various errors that can occur during system operation.
6.1 Basic Procedure of Troubleshooting
System reliability not only depends on reliable equipment but also on short downtimes in the event of fault. The short discovery and corrective
action are needed for speedy operation of system. The following shows the basic instructions for troubleshooting.
(1) Visual checks
Check the following points.
Machine operating condition (in stop and operation status)
Power On/Off
Status of I/O devices
Condition of wiring (I/O wires, extension and communications cables)
Display states of various indicators (such as POWER LED, RUN LED, ERR LED and I/O LED)
After checking them, connect peripheral devices and check the operation status of the PLC and the program contents.
(2) Trouble Check
Observe any change in the error conditions during the following.
Switch to the STOP position, and then turn the power on and off.
(3) Narrow down the possible causes of the trouble where the fault lies, i.e.:
Inside or outside of the PLC ?
I/O module or another module?
PLC program?
6.2 Troubleshooting
This section explains the procedure for determining the cause of troubles as well as the errors and corrective actions.
Symptoms
Is the power LED turned
Off ?
Flowchart used when the POWER LED is turned Off.
Is the ERR LED flickering ? Flowchart used when the ERR LED is flickering.
Are the RUN, STOP
LED turned
Flowchart used when the RUN, STOP turned Off.
I/O module doesn’t operate
properly.
flowchart used when the I/O part doesn’t operate normally.
Program cannot be written. Flowchart used when a program can’t be written to the PLC.

System
Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting

6-2

6.2.1 Troubleshooting flowchart used when the PWR (Power) LED turns Off
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the power is supplied or the power
LED turns Off during operation.
Yes
Power LED is turned Off.
Is the power supply
operating?
Is the voltage within the rated
power?
Write down the troubleshooting
Questionnaire and contact
the nearest service center
.

Supply the power.

Does the power LED
turns On?

Supply the power properly.

Does the power LED
turns On?

1) Eliminate the excess current
2) Switch the input power Off then On.

Does the power LED
turns On?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Complete
Over current protection
device activated?

System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-3

6.2.2 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the ERR (Error) LED is flickering
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the power is supplied starts or the ERR LED
is flickering during operation.

Warning
Though warning error appears, PLC system doesn’t stop but corrective action is needed promptly. If not, it
may cause the system failure.

STOP LED goes flickering
No
No
Yes
Check the error code, with
connected XG5000.
Write down the Troubleshooting
Questionnaires and contact the nearest
service center.
See Appendix 1 Flag list and
remove the cause of the
error.
Complete Yes
Warning error?
Is ERR LED still
flicking ?

System
Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting

6-4

6.2.3 Troubleshooting flowchart used with when the RUN , STOP LED turns Off.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure to treat the lights-out of RUN LED when the
power is supplied, operation starts or is in the process.
RUN, STOP LED is Off.
No
Yes
Write down the Troubleshooting
Questionnaires and contact the nearest
service center.
Complete

Turn the power unit Off and On.

Is RUN/ STOP LED Off?
System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-5

6.2.4 Troubleshooting flowchart used when the I/O part doesn’t operate normally.
The following flowchart explains corrective action procedure used when the I/O module doesn’t operate normally.
When the I/O module doesn’t work normally.

Check the status of SOL1
by XG5000.

Is the output LED of SOL1
On?
No

Replace the connector of
the terminal block.

 

Measure the voltage of
terminal in SOL1 by Tester.

 

Correct wiring.

Yes
Is the measured value
normal?
Is the output
wiring correct?
Is the
terminal connector
appropriate?
Is it normal condition?
Separate the external
wiring than check the
condition of output
module.
Is it normal condition?
Check the status of
SOL1.
Replace the Unit
Continue
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes No
Yes
Yes
No
No

System
Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting

6-6

Continue
Are the indicator LED of the
switch 1 and 2 on?
No
Check voltage of switch 1,2 by
tester
Yes
Is the measured value
normal?

Separate the external
wiring witch then check
the status by forced
i t

Is the measured value
normal?
Check the status of the
switch 1 and 2.
Input unit
replacement is
Needed.
Check voltage of switch 1,2 by
tester
Is the measured value
normal?
Is the
terminal screw tighten
securely?
Is input wiring correct?

Correct wiring

Retighten the
terminal screw.

Replace the
Terminal board
connector.

Input unit
replacement is
Needed.
Check from the beginnin
g.
Is the condition
of the terminal board connector
appropriate?
Yes
No
No

Yes

No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No

No

System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-7

6.3 Troubleshooting Questionnaire
If any problem occurs during the operation of XGB series, please write down this Questionnaires and contact the service center via telephone or
facsimile.
For errors relating to special or communication modules, use the questionnaire included in the User’s manual of the unit.
1. Telephone & FAX No

Tell)
2. Using equipment model:
FAX)

3. Details of using equipment

CPU model: ( ) OS version No.: ( ) Serial No. ( )
XG5000 (for program compile) version No.: ( )

4.General description of the device or system used as the control object:
5. The kind of the base unit:
- Operation by the mode setting switch ( ),
- Operation by the XG5000 or communications ( ),
- External memory module operation ( ),
6. Is the STOP. LED of the CPU module turned On ? Yes ( ), No ( )
7. XG5000 error message:
8. History of corrective actions for the error message in the article 7:
9. Other tried corrective actions:
10. Characteristics of the error

Repetitive (
Sometimes (
): Periodic ( ), Related to a particular sequence ( ), Related to environment ( )
): General error interval:

11. Detailed Description of error contents:
12. Configuration diagram for the applied system:

System
Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting

6-8

 

~
Leakage current
C
AC
input
~
Leakage current
~
~ ~
Leakage current

6.4 Troubleshooting Examples
Possible troubles with various circuits and their corrective actions are explained.
6.4.1 Input circuit troubles and corrective actions
The followings describe possible troubles with input circuits, as well as corrective actions.

Condition Cause Corrective Actions
Input signal
doesn’t turn off.
Leakage current of external device
(Such as a drive by non-contact switch)
Connect an appropriate register and capacity,
which will make the voltage lower across the
terminals of the input module.
CR values are determined by the leakage
current value.
- Recommended value C : 0.1 ~ 0.47
R: 47 ~ 120 (1/2W)
Or make up another independent display circuit.
Input signal
doesn’t turn off.
(Neon lamp
may be still on)
Leakage current of external device
(Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp)
Input signal
doesn’t turn off.
Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable. Locate the power supply on the external device side
as shown below.
Input signal
doesn’t turn off.
Leakage current of external device (Drive by switch
with LED indicator)
Connect an appropriate register, which will make the
voltage higher than the OFF voltage across the input module
terminal and common terminal.

R
C
External device
AC input
R
C
External device
AC input
R
AC input
External device
External device
AC input
Leakage current
External device
DC input
R
DC input
R
System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-9

 

Input signal
doesn’t turn off.
Sneak current due to the use of two different power
supplies.
E1 > E2, sneaked.
Use only one power supply.
Connect a sneak current prevention diode.

6.4.2 Output circuit and corrective actions
The following describes possible troubles with output circuits, as well as their corrective actions.

Condition Cause Corrective Action
When the output is
off, excessive
voltage is applied
to the load.
Load is half-wave rectified inside (in some cases,
it is true of a solenoid)
When the polarity of the power supply is as shown
in

②, the voltage charged in
C plus the line voltage are
applied across D. Max. voltage is approx. 2√2.
*) If a resistor is used in this way, it does not pose a
problem to the output element. But it may make the
performance of the diode (D), which is built in the
load, drop to cause problems.
Connect registers of tens to hundreds KΩ across the
load in parallel.
The load doesn’t
turn off.
Leakage current by surge absorbing circuit, which
is connected to output element in parallel.
Connect C and R across the load, which are of
registers of tens KΩ. When the wiring distance from the
output module to the load is long, there may be a
leakage current due to the line capacity.

 

E E1

DC input
L
E
DC input
L
E

R
Load
C
Leakage current
~
← ↑
~
~

R
Load
C R
Load
Output
C
R
Load
D
C
R
Load
R
D

System
Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting

6-10

 

When the load is C
R type timer, time
constant fluctuates.
Leakage current by surge absorbing circuit, which
is connected to output element in parallel.
Drive the relay using a contact and drive the C-R type
timer using the since contact.
Use other timer than the C-R contact some timers
have half-ware rectified internal circuits therefore, be
cautious.
The load does not
turn off.
Sneak current due to the use of two different
power supplies.
E1<E2, sneaks. E1 is off (E2 is on), sneaks.
Use only one power supply.
Connect a sneak current prevention diode.
If the load is the relay, etc, connect a counter
electromotive voltage absorbing code as shown by the
dot line.

;
Output circuit troubles and corrective actions (continued).

Condition Cause Corrective actions
The load off
response
time is long.
Over current at off state [The large solenoid
current fluidic load (L/R is large) such as is
directly driven with the transistor output.
The off response time can be delayed by one or
more second as some loads make the current
flow across the diode at the off time of the
transistor output.
Insert a small L/R magnetic contact and drive the
load using the same contact.

Output
Loa
d
Output
Load

E E1
Leakage current
Output
~
X
T
Timer
Output
~

E
Load
E2
Output
C
R
Load
Output
Load

E1
Off current

System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-11

 

Output
transistor is
destroyed.
Surge current of the white lamp on.
A surge current of 10 times or more when turned
on.
To suppress the surge current make the dark
current of 1/3 to 1/5 rated current flow.

Output

E
Sink type transistor output
E
E1

R
Source type transistor
output
Output
R Output

System
Chapter 6 Trouble Shooting

6-12

6.5 Error Code List

Error
code
(Dec)
Error cause Action
(restart mode after taking an action)
Operation
status
LED
status
Diagnosis
point
23 Program to execute is
abnormal
Start after reloading the program Warning 0.5 second Flicker RUN mode
24 I/O parameter error Start after reloading I/O parameter,
Battery change if battery has a problem.
Check the preservation status after I/O parameter
reloading and if error occurs, change the unit.
Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
Reset
RUN mode
switching
25 Basic parameter error Start after reloading Basic parameter,
Change battery if it has a problem.
Check the preservation status after Basic
parameter reloading and if error occurs, change
the unit.
Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
Reset
RUN mode
switching
26 Compile error exceed Reduce the program and down. Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
RUN
mode
switching
27 Compile error Check the program Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
RUN
mode
switching
30 Module set in parameter
and the installed module
does not match
modify the module or parameter and then restart. Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
RUN mode
switching
31 Module falling during
operation or additional
setup
After checking the position of
attachment/detachment of expansion module
during Run mode
Heavy error 0.1 second
Flicker
Every scan
33 Data of I/O module does
not access normally during
operation.
After checking the position of slot where the
access error occurs by XG5000, change the
module and restar (acc.to parameter.)
Heavy error 0.1 second
Flicker
Scan end
34 Normal access of
special/link module
data during operation not
available
After checking the position of slot that access error
occurred by XG5000, change the module and
restart (acc.to parameter).
Heavy error 0.1 second
Flicker
Scan end
38 Extension
Module exceed
Extension module is attached over 10 slot or
communication module is attached over 3 slot
Heavy error 0.1 second Flicker
RUN mode
switching
39 Abnormal stop of
CPU or malfunction
Abnormal system end by noise or hard ware error.
1) If it occurs repeatedly when power
reinput, request service center
2) Noise measures
Heavy error 0.1 second
Flicker
Ordinary
time
40 Scan time of program
during operation
exceeds the scan
watchdog time
designated by
parameter.
After checking the scan watchdog time designated
by parameter, modify the parameter or the
program and then restart.
Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
While
running the
program

System
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting

6-13

 

Error
code
(Dec)
Error cause Action
(restart mode after taking an action)
Operation
status
LED
status
Diagnosis
point
41 Operation error
occurs while
running the user
program.
Remove operation error → reload the program
and restart.
Warning 0.5 second
Flicker
While
running the
program
44 Timer index user
error
After reloading a timer index program modification,
start
Warning 0.5 second Flicker Scan end
50 Heavy error of
external device
Refer to Heavy error detection flag and modifies
the device and restart. (Acc. Parameter)
Warning 0.5 second Flicker Scan end
55 Task confliction Check task occurrence Warning 1 second
Flicker
Every time
60 E_STOP function
executed
After removing error causes which starts E_STOP
function in program, power reinput
Warning 1 second Flicker running the While
program
500 Data memory backup not
possible
If not error in battery, power reinput
Remote mode is switched to STOP mode.
Warning 1 second Flicker Reset
501 Abnormal clock data Setting the time by XG5000 if there is no error Warning 1second
Flicker
Ordinary
time

Chapter 7 EMC Standard
7-1
Chapter 7 EMC Standard
The following explains contents, diagnosis and corrective actions for various errors that can occur during system operation.
7.1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive
The EMC Directive specifies the products must “be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic
interference (emissions) and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference (immunity)”. The applicable products
are requested to meet these requirements.
This section summarizes the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery assembled using PLC
XGB series. The details of these precautions are based on the requirements and the applicable standards control.
However, LSIS will not guarantee that the overall machinery manufactured according to the these details conforms to the
below-described directives. The method of conformance to the EMC directive and the judgment on whether or not the
machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery.
7.1.1 EMC Standard
The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below.
Table13-1

Specification Test item Test details Standard value
EN50081-2 EN55011
Radiated noise
2
Electromagnetic emissions from the
product are measured
30~230 QP : 50 ㏈㎶/m 1
230~1000
QP : 57 ㏈㎶/m
EN55011
Conducted noise
Electromagnetic emissions from the
product to the power line is measured
150~500 QP : 79 Mean: 66
500~230 QP : 73 Mean: 60
EN61131-2 EN61000-4-2
Electrostatic
immunity
Immunity test in which static electricity is
applied to the case of the equipment
15 Aerial discharge
8
Contact discharge
EN61000-4-4
Fast transient
burst noise
Immunity test in which burst noise is
applied to the power line and signal lines
Power line: 2
Digital /O : 1
Analog I/O, signal lines: 1
EN61000-4-3
Radiated field AM
modulation
Immunity test in which field is irradiated to
the product
10Vm,26~1000
80%AM modulation@ 1
EN61000-4-12
Damped oscillatory
wave immunity
Immunity Testing of Fluctuating Damped
Oscillation in Electric Power Line
Power line: 1
Digital I/O (24V or higher): 1

1) QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean: Average value
2) The PLC is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a conductive control
panel. The tests for the corresponding items were performed while the PLC was installed inside a control panel.

Chapter 7 EMC Standard
7-2
7.1.2 Control Panel
The PLC is an open type device (device installed to another device) and must be installed in a control panel. This is
needed to prevent electric shock by touching XGB PLC and reduce the PLC-generated noise. Install the XGB PLC
in a metallic panel to reduce PLC-generated EMI (Electro-magnetic interference),
The specifications for the control panel are as follows:
(1) Control panel
The PLC control panel must have the following features:
(a) Use SPCC (Cold Rolled Mild Steel) for the control panel.
(b) The steel plate should be thicker than 1.6mm.
(c) Use isolating transformers to protect the power supply from external surge voltage.
(d) The control panel must have a structure which the radio waves does not leak out.
For example, make the door as a box-structure so that the panel body and the door are overlapped each other. This
structure reduces the surge voltage generate by PLC.
(e) To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel or base plate, mask painting and weld so that good
surface contact can be made between the panel and plate.
Panel body
Door
Seal

System
Chapter 7 EMC Standard

7-3

(2) Connection of power and earth wires
Earthing and power supply wires for the PLC system must be connected as described below.
(a) Earth the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedanceconnection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies.
(b) The function of LG (Line Ground) and FG (Frame Ground) terminals is to pass the noise generated in the PLC system to the ground,
so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured.
(c)The earthing wire itself can generate the noise, so wire as short and thick to preventfrom acting as an antenna.
(d) Attach ferrite core under the power cable to satisfy CE specification.
[ferrite core]

manufacture name External Dimension (mm) maximum
cable
diameter
(mm)
address
A B C D
Laird 28A3851-0A2 30.00 13.00 33.70 30.00 12.85 www.lairdtech.com
Laird 28A5776-0A2 29.20 20.00 42.00 42.00 19.40 www.lairdtech.com
Coilmaster C2L RU130B 31.50 13.00 33.00 31.50 13.00 www.coilmaster.com.tw
TDK ZCAT3035-1330 30.00 13.00 34.00 30.00 13.00 www.tdk.com

 

ferrite core

System
Chapter 7 EMC Standard

7-4

7.2 Requirement to Conform to the Low-voltage Directive
The low-voltage directive requires each device that operates with the power supply ranging from 50V to 1000VAC and 75V to 1500VDC to satisfy
the safety requirements. Cautions and installation and wiring of the PLC XGB series to conform to the low-voltage directive are described in this
section.
The described contents in this manual are based on the requirements and the applicable standards control. However, LSIS will not guarantee
that the overall machinery manufactured according to the these details conforms to the above regulation. The method of conformance to the
EMC directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer
of the machinery.
7.2.1 Standard Applied for XGB Series
The XGB PLC complies with EN6100-1 (safety of equipment used in measurement and control laboratories.
XGB series PLCs have been developed in accordance with the above standards for modules operating at rated voltage of AC50V / DC75V
or higher.
7.2.2 XGB Series PLC Selection
(1) Power and CPU
Since the rated voltage of the main unit is less than the DC24V rating, it is outside the scope of the low voltage command.
(2) I/O module
There are dangerous voltages (voltages higher than 42.4V peak) inside the I/O modules of the
AC110/220V rated I/O voltages. Therefore, the CE mark-compliant models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and
secondary.
The I/O modules of DC24V or less rating are out of the low-voltage directive application range.
(3) Special module, Communication module
The special module and communication modules are DC24V or less in rated voltage, therefore they are out of the low-voltage directive
application range.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-1

Part 2.Basic Fuctions
This Chapter covers the details of programming and operations, monitoring of basic unit
Chapter 1 Program Configuration and Operation Method
1.1 Programming Basics
1.1.1 Programming Method
The basic unit supports programming method of repetitive operation interrupt operation, fixed operation.
(1) Repetitive operation mode (Scan)
It means the basic programming method of the PLC.
It is the method that performs the written program repetitively from the first step to the last one and a series of such procedures is
called ‘program scan’. A series of such processing is called the repetitive operation mode and it can be divided as below.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-2

(2) Interrupt operation mode
(fixed cycle, external interrupt, internal device start, high speed counter, positioning control)
It is the mode that suspends the currently executed scan program operation and handles the interrupt program
immediately when urgent priority matter occurs during execution of the PLC scan program. The signals that inform
the CPU of such interrupt occurrence is called ‘interrupt signal’ and there are 4 kinds as below. For more details on
each interrupt operation, refer to Section 1.1.5 ~ 1.1.10.
(For the positioning interrupt operation method, refer to Chapter 3 Built-in Positioning)
Fixed cycle signal: Interrupt signal occurring at the fixed interval
External input signal: External contact (P0000~00007) input signal
Internal device: In case the internal device value is matched with the set occurrence condition
High speed counter: In case the high speed counter current value is matched with the set value
Position : An interrupt signal generated at a predetermined time interval
(3) Fixed Cycle Operation mode
It is the mode that executes the scan program every fixed time.
After executing all scan programs, it stands by until the fixed cycle time and then, the next scan will resume at the
specified time.
At this time, the current scan time displayed in F area indicates the net program processing time except waiting time.
If the actual scan program processing time is longer than the fixed cycle, fixed cycle error flag will be turned On. The
flags related to fixed cycle operation are as below.

Bit Flag Name Name Description
F005C _CONSTANT_ER Fixed cycle error In case the actual scan time is longer than the fixed
cycle set value
F0080 _CONSTANT_RUN Fixed cycle operation is
running
Turned ON during fixed cycle operation

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-3

1.1.2 Execution processing in case of instantaneous interruption
If the input power voltage supplied to basic unit is lower than the specification, the PLC will detect instantaneous
interruption.
When the PLC detects instantaneous interruption, the following execution processing will run.

Blackout time Execution processing
(1) Execution is interrupted, maintaining output state of when
instantaneous interruption occurred.
(2) If instantaneous interruption is canceled, execution will
resume.
(3) In case execution is suspended due to instantaneous
interruption, timer measurement and one for fixed cycle
interrupt will be continuously run.
(1) If instantaneous interruption exceeds 1ms, the PLC will
execute restart like the time when power is supplied.

The below figure shows the PLC’s execution processing flow chart when instantaneous interruption occurs.
Notice
Instantaneous interruption means the state that the PLC exceeds the allowable variation rage of the specified power
and is lower than the range. The brief (several ms ~ dozens of ms) blackout is called instantaneous interruption.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-4

1.1.3 Scan Time
The scan time is the time that takes to complete a single control operation from step 0 of the full scan program to
step 0 of the next scan; it is directly connected to the system’s control performance.
(1) Scan time formula
The scan time is the sum of the process time of the scan program and interrupt program written by a user and
the PLC’s internal END processing time; it can be calculated by the below formula.
(a) Scan time = scan program processing time
interrupt program processing timePLC internal processing
time
Scan program processing time = Processing time of the user program excluding the interrupt program
Interrupt program processing time = Sum of the interrupt program running time processed for 1 scan
PLC internal processing time = Self-diagnosis time I/O refresh time internal data processing time
communication service processing time (processing XG5000 service and embedded communication)

Model MPU processing time Expansion interface processing time
Scan program
running (32K)
PLC
internal
Processing
time
Digital I/O module
(32 points, 1 EA)
Analog module
(8 channels,
1EA)
Communication module
(200 byte, 1 block)
XBM-DN32HP 7.2 ㎳ 0.8㎳ 0.3㎳ 2.0㎳ 0.8㎳

XBM ’HP’ unit performs the control operation based on the below sequence. Accordingly, you can estimate the rough control
performance of the system to be designed by using the below calculation method.
기본유닛 래더수행시간 래더수행시간
증설 모듈
시스템 처리
태스크처리
I/O처리시간

통신 모듈 서비스
XG5000 서비스
Communication module service
XG5000
Ladder processing
Ladder processingtime

Input
Output
통신데이터

자체처리
Self-p
ocessing
입출력모듈
데이터교환 통신모듈
데이터교환
Exchange of c
ommunication module data

스캔시간
Scan time = Ladder running time + system processing time + digital module I/O processing time + analog I/O
processing time + communication module processing time + XG5000 Service processing time
I/O processing time Scan time
System processing
Task processing
Exchange of I/O module data Basic unit
Expansion
module
Comm. data
Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-5

(2) Example of calculating the scan time
The example of the PLC’s system configuration and the calculation result of the scan time are as follows.

Items System Configuration
Basic unit SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 SLOT7 SLOT8
Product
name
XBM-DN32HP XBE-DC32A * 3EA XBF-AD04A * 2EA XBL-C41A XBL-EMTA
Operating
conditions
20kStep - - 200 Byte 1 block per module,
Scan time= Ladder running time + system processing time + digital I/O processing time +
analog I/O processing time + communication module processing time + XG5000 Service
processing time = 7.2 + 0.8 + 0.3*3 + 2.0*2 + 0.8*2 +0.1= 14.6㎳

However, in the event of changing during RUN or writing communication parameters with XG5000, it requires
converting the program changed during RUN into executable machine code in the PLC or other internal
processing operations for changed communication parameters so the scan time may be temporarily increased
by several ms or more.
(3) Verification of the scan time
The PLC’s scan time can be verified by using XG5000 or flag as below.
(a) How to use XG5000: Click
Online-Diagnosis-PLC information-Performance.
(b) How to use flag : The scan time is saved in the below system flag (F) area.

WORD Flag Name Name Description
F0050 _SCAN_MAX Maximum scan time The longest scan time
(update in case of occurrence only), in 0.1ms
F0051 _SCAN_MIX Minimum scan time The shortest scan time
(update in case of occurrence only), in 0.1ms
F0052 _SCAN_MAX Current scan time Running time of this scan (scan update), in 0.1ms

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-6

1.1.4 Program Composition
The program is composed of all function factors required to perform a specific control and they are saved in the
basic unit’s RAM or flash memory. The function factors to execute the program can be generally divided as below.

Function factors Executing details
Initialization program After applying power, it is the program that is firstly executed after completing the self
initialization operations required to operate the PLC. It should run until the INIT_DONE
command executes.
When the initialization program runs, only the initialization program is available until the
INIT_DONE command runs; the scan program and fixed cycle, external interrupt, internal
device task program are not executed. All other embedded functions such as I/O refresh, high
speed counter, communication are normally executed.
It is used to program various operations required for the initial settings of the system
configured with the high performance XGB PLC.
Scan program Repeated regularly at every scan. It performs the operation repetitively from the first step to
the last step in order of being written.
If the fixed cycle interrupt, external contact interrupt, high speed counter interrupt occur
during execution of the scan program, it will stop the scan program and return to the
scan program after executing the relevant interrupt program.
Fixed cycle interrupt
program
Executed at every set cycle regardless of the scan program. It can be applied to execute the
following time conditions.
Execution at the shorter time interval than 1 scan processing time
Execution at the longer time interval than 1 scan processing time
Execution at the fixed time interval
External contact
interrupt program
Executed every time the input conditions (rising edge, falling edge, transition) of the set
external input signal occur. It can be applied when immediate execution is required for external
input conditions.
High speed counter
interrupt program
Executed when the high speed counter’s current value is matched with the set value.
positioning interrupt
program
refer to Part 3 Built-in Positioning
Internal device
interrupt program
Executed when the set internal device is matched with relational conditions.
Detects whether starting conditions of the internal device interrupt occurs during END after
executing the scan program
Subroutine program Executed only when the input condition of the CALL command is On.

Notice
1) Make the interrupt program as shortly as possible. In case the same interrupt occurs repeatedly during
executing the interrupt program, O/S watchdog error may occur with non-execution of the scan program.
(In case the self-interrupt occurs during executing the interrupt program, task conflict error may occur.)
2)Although interrupts with low priority occur several times during executing the one with high priority, the interrupt
will run just once so you should pay attention to set up the priority.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-7

1.1.5 Interrupt
(1) Interrupt processing flow chart
It describes the PLC’s operation flow chart, giving you the example of setting the interrupt program as below.
Interrupt setting

Interrupt type Interrupt Name Priority Task No. Program Name Remarks
Initialization Interrupt0 - - Initialization program
Fixed cycle 1 Interrupt1 2 0 Fixed cycle 1
External Interrupt2 2 16 External
Internal device Interrupt3 3 24 Internal device
Interrupt4 4 40 High speed counter
Fixed cycle 2 Interrupt5 3 1 Fixed cycle 2

High speed
counter
Initializing
(Before INIT_DONE instruction)
Interrupt 1_Cycle time Cycle time 1 execution
occur
Cycle time 1/
external occur
simultaneously
Cycle time 1 execution
External I/O execution
Internal device
Interrupt occur

Internal device interrupt
execution
Cycle time 1
execution

Timed-driven 1
execution
Cycle time 2
occur
Cycle time 2 execution
END
Scan program
Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-8

Notice
1) If the interrupt with the same priority occur at the same time, the early set interrupt will be executed first. (In
case ‘interrupt 1’and‘interrupt 2’occur at the same time, ‘interrupt1’will be executed first.)
2) If the interrupt with higher priority occurs during execution of interrupts, the interrupt with higher priority will be
executed first.
3) All interrupts are allowable (Enable) when the power is On. If you want to run by interrupt program or prohibit
them, you can use EI, DI command.
4) The internal device interrupt will run after getting the END command.
(2) Types and operation standards of tasks
The types and operation standards of tasks that are available for the high performance small-sized PLC are as
below.

Type
Spec.
Fixed cycle task External contact task Internal contact task High speed counter task positioning task
Maximum
number
16 EA 8 EA 16 EA 4 EA 1EA
Start
conditions
Fixed cycle (Can be
set up to
4,294,967.295
seconds, in 1ms )
Rising or falling edge of
the basic unit
P000~P007
input contacts
Internal device’s
designated conditions
High speed counter
comparative output 0 /
The minimum set value
is matched
Fixed cycle (can be set
up to 10ms in 1ms
increments)
Detection
and
Execution
Executed cyclically at
every setting time
Executed immediately
when the edge of the
basic unit P008~P00F
input contacts occur
Executed with
searching conditions
after completing the
scan program
Executed when the
current counter value is
matched with the
minimum set value of
the comparative output
0
Executed cyclically at
every setting time
Detection
delay
Time
Delayed for the
maximum of 1ms
Within the maximum of
0.05
Delayed as much as the
maximum scan time
Within the maximum of
0.25
Delayed for the
maximum of 1ms
Priority of
execution
s
2 ~ 7 level setting
(2 level has the
highest priority)
Same as the left Same as the left Same as the left Cannot set priority
(Has a higher priority
than other tasks)
Task No. Designated without
overlapped users in
the range of 0~15
Designated without
overlapped users in the
range of 16~23
Designated without
overlapped users in the
range of 24~39
Designated without
overlapped users in the
range of 40~43
44

(3) Processing method of the task program
It describes the common processing methods and instructions for the task program.
(a) Characteristics of the task program
In contrast with the scan program, the task program runs only when the execution conditions occur
without repetition processing. When writing the task program, consider this point.
For example, if the timer and counter are applied to the task program with the fixed cycle of 10 seconds,
the maxim error of 10 seconds may occur in the timer. The counter reflects the input state every 10
seconds so the input that changed within 10 seconds is not counted.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-9

(b) Execution priority
In case several tasks to be executed stand by, the task program with high priority should be processed
first. If the tasks with the same priority stand by, they should be processed in order of occurrence.
When the fixed cycle task and external contact task occur at the same time, the task set early by
XG5000 will be executed by priority.
Set up the priority of the task programs in consideration of characteristics, importance of the programs
and urgency of required executions.
(c)Processing delay time
The delay of task program processing is caused by the below causes. Consider these factors when setting
up tasks and writing programs.
Delayed detection of tasks (Refer to the detailed description of each task.)
Program execution delay due to execution of the preceding task program
Input/output data refresh of expansion special module
(d) Relation between the initialization, scan program and the task program
When executing the initialization task program, the fixed cycle, external contact, high speed counter,
internal contact task cannot be started.
The scan program has the lowest priority so when the task occurs, the scan program will be suspended
and the task program will be executed preemptively. Accordingly, in case the tasks occur frequently during
one scan or they converge intermittently, the scan time may be extended abnormally. You should consider
this point when setting tasks.
(e) Protection of the currently running scan program by prohibiting tasks execution
If you do not want the scan program to be suspended by the task program with high priority during
executing the scan program, you can partially prohibit the execution of task programs by using the below
DI, EI command in order to protect the scan program.
(When the power is supplied to the PLC, the initial values of all tasks are EI (allowable) state.)

Command Use Description
EI Allows the start of all tasks.
DI Prohibits the start of all tasks.
EIN Allows the start of the task designated as n.
DIN Prohibits the start of the task designated as n.

(4)Verification of task program
After writing the task program, verify it based on the following instructions.
(a) Are the occurrence conditions of tasks proper?
If tasks occur frequently beyond necessity or if several tasks occur in one scan, the scan time may be
extended or become irregular. / If you cannot change task settings, check the maximum scan time.
(b) Are the priorities of tasks arranged well?
The task program with low priority may be delayed and fail to be executed in time due to the task program
with high priority, in some cases, the pending tasks occur redundantly during execution of the preceding
tasks so it may lead to tasks conflicts.
Set up the priority in consideration of urgency, running time, etc. of tasks.
(c) Are task programs made as shortly as possible?
Long running time of the task program can cause the long or irregular scan time or may lead to the conflict of task

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-10

programs. Make the task programs as shortly as possible.
Especially, when attaching expansion special module, or using PUT,GET instructions, program processing might
be delayed.( More than 10ms task cycle is recommended).
When making the task program with fixed cycle, the task program should be executed within 10% of the operation
cycle of the shortest task among several tasks.
Ex.) When the task program’s running time is 1ms, the fixed cycle time should be more than 10ms.
(d) Is the protection of the program needed for the task with high priority during execution of the program?
If the other task interrupts during execution of the task program, after the executing task is completed, among
pending tasks, the one will run in order of priority. If you do not want interruption of other tasks during
execution of the task program, protect the program with DI, EI applied commands.
(5)Example of program configuration and processing
The example of the program execution sequence is given under the registered tasks and programs as below.
• Registered task programs

Interrupt source Interrupt Name Priority Task No. Program Name running time
Fixed cycle 10_fixed cycle 3 0 Program1 2ms
Internal contact Internalcontact_M00 5 24 Program2 7ms
External contact Externalcontact_P08 2 16 Program3 2ms
- - - - Scan program 17ms

 

Time () Executed details
0~6 The scan program starts and is executed.
6~8 Request on running the external contact interrupt is entered and the scan program is interrupted and
the program 3 runs. There is the request on rerun at 7[
] but it is ignored since the program is running.
8~10 The execution of the program 3 is completed and the scan program will run continuously.
10~12 There is the request on running 10_fixed cycle interrupt so the scan program is interrupted and the
program 1 runs.

Execution of
Scan program
Execution of program 1
Occurrence
of 10ms_fixed cycle
Execution of program 2
Occurrence of
Internal contact M000
Execution of program 3
Occurrence of
external contact P000
Time
0 6 7 8 10 12 20 22 24 25 30 32 34
Scan startup
(Initial operation setup)
End of Scan program
New scan startup

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-11

 

time () Executed details
12~20 The execution of the program 1 is completed and the scan program that was interrupted runs
continuously.
20 Although there are the requests on 10_fixed cycle interrupt and the external contact interrupt at the
same time, the external contact interrupt has higher priority so the program 3 runs and the program 1
stands by for execution.
20~22 The scan program is interrupted and the program 3 runs.
22~24 The execution of the program 3 is completed and the pending 10_fixed cycle interrupt program 1
runs.
24~25 The execution of the program 1 is completed and the scan program is finished.
25 The program 2 is executed by checking the interrupt request on internal contact_M0 of P2 at the time
of completion of the scan program.
25~30 The program 2 runs.
30~32 The request on 10_fixed cycle interrupt occurs and the 10_fixed cycle has higher priority so the
program 2 is interrupted and the program 1 runs.
32~34 The execution of the program 1 is completed and the program 2 that was interrupted is finished.
34 The new scan starts (startup of executing the scan program)

1.1.6 Initialization task
(1) How to set up the task
You can add initialization tasks in the project window of XG5000 as below and add the programs to be
executed. For more details, refer to the XG5000 manual. (You cannot add tasks on online. After disconnecting
the PLC, add tasks.)
(a) Adding task: Select
ProjectAdd ItemsTaskor after clicking with the right mouse button on
the project name of the project tree, select
Add Items-Taskas shown in the below figure.
(b) The screen for registering the task will be displayed. Click
Initializationin the execution conditions
and enter the task name.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-12

(c) Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items-Program.
(d) Make the necessary initialization program and make sure to include the INIT_DONE command to the
initialization task program.
(If the operation conditions of INIT_DONE runs, the initialization task is ended and the scan program runs.)

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-13

1.1.7 Fixed cycle task
(1) How to set up the task
(a) Adding tasks: Select
ProjectAdd ItemsTaskor after clicking with the right mouse button on
the project name of the project tree, select
Add Items-Taskas shown in the below figure.
(b) The screen for registering the task will be displayed. Click
Fixed cyclein the execution conditions and
after entering the task name, input the items required for setting as below

Items Input range Description
priority 2~7 Designates the priority of tasks.
Task No. 0~15 Designates the task number.
The numbers overlapped with are not available.
cycle 1~4,294,967,295 () Designates the task’s running cycle.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-14

(c) Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items-Program.
(d) Register the task program name and comment.
(e) If the program window for writing the task program is displayed, you can make the task program here.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-15

(2) Instructions to use the fixed cycle task
The corresponding task program with fixed cycle runs at every set time interval (running cycle) and keep
the below instructions in mind.
• When the specific task program with the fixed cycle runs currently or stands by for execution, if the request
on running the same task program occurs, the newly occurred task will be ignored.
• The timer generating the request on running the task program with fixed cycle works only when the
operation mode is RUN mode. Ignore all the blackout time.
• When setting up the running cycle of the task program with fixed cycle, the request on running several task
programs should not occur.
If you apply 4 task programs with the fixed cycle of 2 seconds, 4 seconds, 10 seconds, 20 seconds, 4
execution requests occur simultaneously every 20 seconds and 4 tasks runs at once so the scan time
may be longer momentarily.
1.1.8 External contact task
(1) How to set up the task
(a) Adding tasks: Select
ProjectAdd ItemsTaskor after clicking with the right mouse button on
the project name of the project tree, select
Add Items-Taskas shown in the below figure.
(b) The screen for registering the task will be displayed. Click
External contactin the execution conditions
and after entering the task name, input the items required for setting as below.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-16

 

Items Input range Description
Priority 2~7 Designates the priority of tasks.
Task No. 16~23 Designates the task number.
The numbers overlapped with are not available.
Contact No. 0~7 Designates the task start contact number.
Starting
conditions
rising, falling, transition Sets up starting conditions of tasks.

(c) Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items-Program.
(d) Register the task program name and comment.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-17

(e) If the program window for writing the task program is displayed, you can make the task program here.
(3) Instructions to use the external contact task
When the rising, falling or transition conditions occur in the set input contact, the corresponding external contact task
program runs and keep the below instructions in mind.
• 8 external contacts are available in the range of P0000~P0007.
• When the specific external contact task program runs currently or stands by for execution, if the request on
running the same input task program occurs, the newly occurred task will be ignored.
• The input contact monitoring for the external contact tasks is executed only when the operation mode is
RUN mode. The input contact monitoring for task startup is not executed in STOP mode.
• The detection delay time of the external contact task is approximately 50us.
• When designing the system, several external contact tasks should not start at the same time. If P0000 ~
P0007 contacts are ON at the same time under all the external contacts of P0000 ~ P0007 are set as the
external contact tasks, 8 external contact task programs run at one so the scan time may be longer
momentarily.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-18

1.1.9 Internal device task
(1) How to set up the task
(a) Adding tasks: Select
ProjectAdd ItemsTaskor after clicking with the right mouse button on
the project name of the project tree, select
Add Items-Taskas shown in the below figure.
(b) The screen for registering the task will be displayed. Click
Internal devicein the execution conditions and after
entering the task name, input the items required for setting as below.

Items Input range Description
Priority 2~7 Designates the priority of tasks..
Task No. 24~39 Designates the task number.
The numbers overlapped with are not available.
Internal device BIT, WORD Selects the device type that will start the task.
Device Direct input Input directly the device that will start the task and set the startup
conditions.
Startup
conditio
ns
Bit Rising, falling, transition, On,
Off
Rising Starts the task in case of rising edge.
Falling Starts the task in case of falling edge.
Transition Starts the task in case of rising or falling edge.
On Starts every scan task during ON.
Off Starts every scan task during OFF.
Word <, <=, ==, >=, > < Starts the task when the word is less than the set
value.
<= Starts the task when the word is less than or equal
to the set value.
== Starts the task when the word is the same as the
set value.
>= Starts the task when the word is more than or equal
to the set value.
> Starts the task when the word is more than the set
value.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-19

(c) Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items-Program.
(d) Register the task program name and comment.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-20

(e) If the program window for writing the task program is displayed, you can make the task program here.
(2) Instructions to use the internal device task
The internal contact task detects the startup conditions of the internal device set by the scan END and runs the
relevant internal device task program. Keep the below instructions in mind.
•The internal device task program runs when the scan program is completed. Accordingly, although the
execution conditions of the internal device task program occur in the scan programs or task programs (fixed
cycle, external contact, high speed counter), it will run at the time of completing the scan program instead of
running immediately.
• In the case of the internal device task, the execution conditions are searched when the scan program is
completed. Accordingly, if the execution conditions of the internal device task occur and dissipate by the scan
program or other task programs, the task will not run since the execution conditions cannot detected at the
time of searching the conditions.
1.1.10 High speed counter task
(1) How to set up the task
(a) Adding tasks: Select
ProjectAdd ItemsTaskor after clicking with the right mouse button on
the project name of the project tree, select
Add Items-Taskas shown in the below figure.
(b) The screen for registering the task will be displayed. Click
High speed counterin the execution conditions
and after entering the task name, select the channel.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-21

(c) Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items-Program.
(d) Register the task program name and comment.
(e) If the program window for writing the task program is displayed, you can make the task program here.
(2) Instructions to use the high speed counter task
• When the high speed counter’s current value in the selected channel becomes equal to the comparative output
set value of 0 of the relevant channel in the below Fig., the high speed counter task will be detected and the task
program will run.
• You can check whether the conditions of the high speed counter task occur at every 250us cycle so detection
delay may occur up to 250us.
• The operations of the high speed counter task are performed only when the operation mode is RUN
mode.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-22

1.1.11 Positioning control task
(1) How to set up the task
(c) Adding tasks: Select
ProjectAdd ItemsTaskor after clicking with the right mouse button on
the project name of the project tree, select
Add Items-Taskas shown in the below figure.
(d) The screen for registering the task will be displayed. Click
Position control taskin the execution conditions
and after entering the task name, select the channel.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-23

(c) Click on the right mouse button on the registered task and click Add Items-Program.
(d) Register the task program name and comment.
(e) Details of Positioning control task: refer to Part3 Ch04 Positioning Control

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-24

1.2 Operation mode
The XGB PLC has 3 operation modes; RUN mode, STOP mode, DEBUG mode.
This section describes the execution processing of each operation mode.
1.2.1 RUN mode
It is the mode executing the program normally.
First scan of
RUN mode
Data area initialization
Program validation check

Refresh the output image
area

ERROR mode
excute? No
Refresh the input image
area
Program execution
Interrupt execution
Check the operating state
and failure of expansion
modules
Change
operation mode?
Keep
RUN mode
Mode change
(1) When changing the mode from other into RUN
Initialize the data area at the beginning stage and check the validity of the program to determine whether it can
be executed or not.
(2) Execution processing details
I/O Refresh and program operation are executed.
(a) The interrupt program is executed by detecting the startup conditions of the interrupt program.
(b) Normal operation or fail of the equipped module is checked.
(c) Communication services are executed with other internal processing.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-25

1.2.2 STOP Mode
It is the mode of block state without operations of the program. In STOP mode, you can write the programs and
parameters through XG5000.
(1) When changing the mode from other into STOP
Eliminate the output image area and execute Output Refresh.
(2) Execution processing details
(a) I/O Refresh is executed.
(b) Normal operation or fail of the equipped module is checked.
(c) Communication services are executed with other internal processing.
1.2.3 DEBUG Mode
This is the mode to detect Program error or trace the operation process and the conversion to this mode is available only
in STOP mode. This is the mode to check the program execution state and the contents of each data and verify the
program.
(1) Processing at mode change
(a) Initializes the data area at the beginning of mode change.
(b) Clears the output image area and execute input refresh.
(2) Operation processing contents
(a) Executes I/O refresh.
(b) Debug operation according to setting state.
(c) After finishing Debug operation by the end of Program, execute output refresh.
(d) Examine the normal operation or missing of module.
(e) Executes communication service or other service.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-26

(3) Debug operation
It describes debug mode.

Item Description Remark
Start/Stop Debugging Change the debug↔ stop mode
Go It starts debug operation.
Step Over It operates by 1 step.
Step Into It starts the subroutine program. Other operation is
identical to Step Over.
Step Out It finished the subroutine program.
Go to Cursor It operates to current cursor position.
Set/Remove Breakpoints Set/Removes current cursor position to break points.
Breakpoints List It displays list of breakpoints.
Breakpoint Conditions It specifies device value and number of scan.

(a) Set/Remove Breakpoints
▪Sets breakpoint at current cursor position. After breakpoint setting, (breakpoint setting indicator) is displayed.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-27

(b) Go
▪Run the program to breakpoint. At break-pointer (stop indicator) is displayed.
(c) Step Over
▪Run the program to next step. Step over indicator is displayed.
(d) Breakpoint List
▪It displays current Breakpoint List. It supports Select All, Reset All, Goto, Remove, Remove All.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-28

(e) Break condition
▪It sets Device Break and Scan Break.
Notice
1) Refer to XG5000 Users Manual ‘Chapter 12 Debugging’for detailed information.
Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-29

1.2.4 Change of operation modes
(1) How to change operation modes
You can change the operation mode with the below methods.
(a) Change by the mode key of the basic unit
(b) Change by connecting the programming tool (XG5000) to the PLC
(c) Changing the operation mode of the other basic unit connected to network with XG5000 accessed to the
basic unit 1 (remote access)
(d) Change by using XG5000, HMI, communication module connected to the network
(e) Change by the ‘STOP’ command during execution of the program
(2) Kinds of operation modes
The following operation modes are set by the mode setting key of the basic unit and XG5000’s commands.

Operation mode switch XG5000
command
Operation mode Remarks
RUN Unchangeable Local RUN When the operation mode switch is
located in RUN position, the mode
change by XG5000 is impossible.
STOP RUN remote RUN
STOP remote STOP
Debug Debug
RUN STOP - STOP

(a) The mode change by XG5000 is available only when the operation mode switch is in STOP state.
(b) If you want to change the mode into ‘STOP’ with a switch in the remote RUN state by XG5000, operate
the switch as
STOPRUN STOP.
Notice
▪In case the mode is changed into RUN by a switch in the remote RUN mode, the PLC is operates continuously
without intermission.
▪ Modificaiton is possible during run in the RUN mode by a switch but the mode change operaitons throughXG5000 are
restricted. Only when mode change is not allowable in a remote site, set the mode switch in RUN position.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-30

1.3 Memory
1.3.1 Data memory
(1) Bit device area
Various bit devices are provided by function. In terms of designation method, the first digit indicates the device
type; the middle digit indicates the decimal word position; the last digit indicates the hexadecimal bit position in
word.

Displaying areas
by device
Characteristics of
devices
Purpose
P0000 ~ P2047F I/O contact It is the image area saving the state of I/O contacts. The device reads the
input module state and saves it to the P area.
The P area data saving operation results is saved to the output module.
M0000 ~ M2047F Internal contact It is the internal memory to save bit or word data in the program.
L0000 ~ L4095F Communication
contact
The device displays the state information of high speed link/P2P service
in the communication module.
K00000~K4095F Contacts against
blackout for
embedded special
functions
It is the device area maintaining the data during blackout. It can be used
without setting the parameters against blackout separately. (Among K
areas, some areas are used by the embedded high speed counter, data
log, PID function. If ‘Write’ is executed in the relevant area, the
embedded function will not work normally so be careful about this.
F0000~F2047F Special contacts It is the system flag area managing the flags required to operate the
system in the PLC.
T0000~T2047 Timer contacts It is the area saving the state of the timer contacts/current values/set
values.
C0000~C2047 Counter contacts It is the area saving the state of the counter contacts/current values/set
values.
S00.00~S127.99 Step controller
128 x 100 Step
It is the relay for step control.

(2) Word device area

Displaying areas
by device
Characteristics of
devices
Purpose
D0000~D32767 Data register It is the area keeping the internal data. It also can be expressed as
bit. (Ex.: D0000.0
No.0 bit of D0)
U00.00~U08.31 Analog data register It is the register used to read the data from the special module
equipped to the slot. (It can be expressed as bit)
N0000~N10239 Communication data
register
Area saving the P2P service of the communication module.
(It cannot be expressed as bit)
Z000~Z127 Index register Dedicated device to use index functions
(It cannot be expressed as bit)
T0000~T2047 Timer’s current value
register
Area indicating the timer’s current value.
C0000~C2047 Counter’s current value
register
Area indicating the counter’s current value.
R0000~R32767 File register File saving register, consists of 8 banks

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-31

1.3.2 Memory block diagram
Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-32

1.3.3 Setup of the data latch area
If you want to keep and use the data required for operations or data generated during operations even when the
PLC restarts after the stoppage, ‘data latch’ can be applied. You can use the certain areas of some data devices as
the latch areas by setting parameters.
•You can set up the latch range for the below devices by parameters.

Device Latch area 1 Latch area 2 Characteristics
P X X Image area saving the I/O contacts state
M O O Internal contact area
K X X Contacts that keep the contact state during blackout.
F X X System flag area
T O O Area related to the timer ( For both bit/word )
C O O Area related to the counter (For both bit/word)
S O O Relay for step control
D O O Area saving general word data
U X X Analog data register (Not latched)
L X X High speed link/P2P service state contacts of the communication
module (Not latched)
N X X Communication module’s P2P service address area (latched)
Z X X Register for index only (Not latched)
R X X File register (latched)

Notice
▪K, N, R devices can be basically latched without setting parameters.
▪ P, U, Z devices cannot be latched.
(1) How to set up the latch area
(a) After clicking the ‘Device Area Setup’ of the basic parameter, select the latch to be used and input the initial
address and end address.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-33

(2) Operation of the data latch area
(a) The device set as the latch area keeps the previous data without initialization when the power is recovered
after cutting the power supply of the PLC.
(b) You can delete the latched data in the following ways.
- Deleting latch1, latch 2 with XG5000
- Writing with the program (The initialization program is recommended)
- Inputting 0 in the window of XG5000 monitor
Refer to the below table for Maintaining or Reset (clear) operation of the latch area data depending on the
PLC operations.

No. Operations Detailed operations latch1 latch2 Remarks
1 Power On/Off On / Off Maintain Maintain
2 Reset by XG5000 Overall Reset Reset Maintain
3 Write program (online) - Maintain Maintain
4 Broken backup data Broken SRAM due to (breakdown of a
battery, etc.)
Reset Reset
Broken data due to other reasons Reset Reset
5 XG5000 online Latch 1 Clear Reset Maintain
Latch 2 Clear Reset Reset

(c) If you clickOnline-Reset/Clear -Reset PLC -Overall Reset, the latch 1 area will be
cleared.

Main
Chapter 1 Configuration and Operation Mode of Programs

1-34

(d) After selecting Online-Reset/Clear -Clear PLC latch area 1,2, if you click “Delete”, it will be
cleared.
(3) Deletion of data at once
If you click ‘Delete’ in the memory area, the memory of all devices will be deleted as ‘0’. So this function can be
used when you want to delete the certain area of the device at once.
(a) After selecting
Online-Reset/Clear -Clear PLC -Clear Memory , if you set up the
area to be deleted and click “Delete”, the device area will be cleared.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-1

Chapter 2 CPU Function
2.1 Type Setting
This section descries setting XGB PLC models.

PLC
Name
CPU Type Language Description Remarks
XGB XGB-DR16C3 MK language Dedicated product Modular type
XGB-DR32HL MK language Dedicated product Compact type
XGB-XBCE MK language Economic : XBC-DR10/14/20/30E
XBC-DN10/14/20/30E,
XBC-DP10/14/20/30E
Compact type
XGB-XBCH MK language Deluxe: XBC-DR32/64H, XBC-DN32/64H
XBC-DP32/64H
Compact type
(DC power PLC
included)
XGB-XBCS MK language Standard : XBC-DR20/30/40/60SU,
XBC-DN20/30S (U),
XBC-DN40/60SU
Compact type
XGB-XBMS MK language Standard : XBM-DN16/32S , XBM-DR16S Modular type
XGB-XBMH MK language Deluxe 2axis APM positioning: XBM-DN32H H: O/S Ver 1.x
H2,HP: O/S Ver 2.x
XGB-XBMH2 MK language Deluxe 2axis XPM positioning: XBM-DN32H2
XGB-XBMHP MK language Deluxe 6axis XPM positioning : XBM-DN32HP Modular type
XGB-XBCU MK language high performance :
XBC-DN32U, XBC-DN32UP, XBC-DN32UA
XBC-DP32U, XBC-DP32UP, XBC-DP32UA
XBC-DR28U, XBC-DR28UP, XBC-DR28UA
Compact type
(DC power PLC
included)

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-2

2.2 Parameter Setting
This section describes XGB PLC’s parameter setting.
2.2.1 Basic parameter setting
If you click the basic parameter in the project window, the below screen will be displayed.
You can set up 3 items; ‘Basic operation setting’, ‘Device area setting’, ‘Error operation setting’.

Classification Items Descriptions Set values
Basic
operations
Fixed cycle operation Set the fixed cycle operation time. 1~999
Watchdog timer Set the scan Watch Dog’s time. 10~1000
Standard input filter Set the standard input filter’s time. 1,3,5,10,20,70,100
Output during
debugging
Set whether allowing the actual output during
debug operation.
Allowable/Prohibited
Output Hold when errors
occur
Determine whether allowing the Output Hold
function set in I/O parameters when errors occur
Allowable/Prohibited
Device
area setting
Selection of latch area Set each device’s latch area.
Error
operation
Resumption of
operation in case of
computational errors.
Determine whether stopping or resuming the operation
in case of computational errors.
Stop/Resume

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-3

2.2.2 I/O parameters Setting
It is the function to set up and reserve the information for each I/O. If you click I/O Parameterin the project
window, the below setting window will be displayed.
If you click the
Modulein the slotposition, the list of each module will be displayed. Then, choose the
module that is matched with the actual system to be configured. The selected slot will be displayed as below.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-4

If you press In Detailbutton on the slot image or the relevant slot position in the base window as below, the
window for setting the filter, emergency output will be displayed.

Notice
• In case each set details are different from the actually accessed I/O module, ‘Module Type Mismatch Error’ occur and
the error will be displayed.
• If there is no setting, the CPU reads each I/O module’s information for operation.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-5

2.3 Self-Diagnosis Function
The Self-Diagnosis function is the function for the CPU part to diagnose the PLC system for defects. In case errors occur
during supplying the power to the PLC system or during operation, it detects errors to prevent malfunction of the system and
preventive maintenance.
2.3.1 Scan Watchdog timer (Scan Watchdog Timer)
The WDT (Watchdog Timer) is the function to detect the congestion of programs caused by PLC module’s hardware or
software.
(1) The Watchdog timer is the timer to be used to detect operation delay caused by the user program error. You
can set up the Watchdog timer’s detection time in XG5000’s basic parameters as below (Initial value: 500ms).
(2) The Watchdog timer monitors the scanning time during operation and when set detection time is exceeded, it
stops the PLC’s operations immediately. At this time, the output status is maintained or cleared based on the
details of ‘Output Hold when errors occur’.
(3) If it is expected that the Scan Watchdog Time is exceeded since it takes more time to process the specific part
of the user programs (in case of using FOR ~ NEXT command, CALL command, etc.), clear the Watchdog
timer through the ‘WDT’ command.
The ‘WDT’ command initializes the scan Watchdog time and restarts measuring time from 0.

1 Scan
Scan
Execute WDT
END
Set by 0

WDT
Set value

WDT Count value WDT Count value

(Example of initializing scan Watchdog timer through the WDT command )
(4) In case the Watchdog error occurs, you can clear the error by resupplying the power or converting the mode
into STOP.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-6

2.3.2 Function to save error history
When errors occur, XGB basic unit records the error historyto clean up causes easily. If you click Online-
Error/Warning, you can see the current errors and the history. Remove the causes of errors referring to the details and
correctivemeasures of each error item.

Items Description Remarks
Error/Warning Displays the current Error/Warning. -
Error history Displays Error/Warning occurred in order of time. Saving up to 100

 

Notice
If you click ‘Delete’ in the Error/Warning window, all the saved error history will be deleted.
In case the error histories exceed 100EA, the histories are deleted in order from the one that occurred first and the
100EA recent histories are saved

2.3.3 Failure Management
(1) Failure Types
The troubles are caused by failure of the PLC itself, system configuration’s error, error detection of operational results, etc.They
can be divided into the failure mode stopping the operation for system safety; minor failure mode that informs a user of failure
warning and resumes the operation.
The failures of the PLC system are mainly caused by the below.
• PLC hardware’s problems
• System configuration’s error
• Operational error during execution of user programs
• Detection of errors caused by external device failure
(2) Operation mode in case of failures
In case failures occur, the PLC system records the failure details in the special flag (F area) and determines
whether resuming the operation based on the failure mode.
• In case of the PLC hardware’s failure
In case there are problems with the CPU, power, etc. that the PLC cannot works normally, the system will

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-7

be stopped; In case of minor failures such as a battery’s low voltage, the warning is displayed and the
operation will be resumed.
• In case of system configuration’s error
It is the failure occurred when the actual PLC’s module configuration is not matched with the module
configuration set in XG5000. The system will be stopped.
• Computational error during execution of user programs
In case of the numeric operation error (Ex.: in case the denominator of division operation is 0) occurred
during execution of user programs, the details will be displayed in the error flag and the system will resume
the operation. If the operational time exceeds the operation delay monitoring set time during operation or
equipped I/O modules cannot be normally controlled, the system will be stopped.

Notice
• When operational errors occur during executing programs, you can determine whether resuming the operation based
on the settings of “Basic parameter -> Error operations setting -> Resume the operation in case of operational errors” of
the XG5000 project.
• This parameter’s default value is set as “Resume the operation in case of operational errors”.

• Detection of errors caused by external device failure
The failure of the external control device can be detected by the PLC’s user program; in case of detecting
failures, the system will be stopped; in case of detecting minor failures, only the detection status will be
displayed and the operation will be continued. (For the detailed use of the function to detect external device’s
failures, refer to the 2.3.5 Failure Diagnosis Function for the External Device.)
The information on failures occurrence is saved in the special relay (F area). Among F area flags, the
information related to the failures are as below.

Word Bit Flag Name Function Description
F000 F0002 _ERROR ERROR ERROR status
F002~3 - _CNF_ER System error Reports the failure status of the system.
F0021 _IO_TYER Module type error The module type is not matched.
F0022 _IO_DEER Module separation error The module is separated.
F0024 _IO_RWER Module I/O error There are some problems with the module
I/O.
F0025 _IP_IFER Module interface error There are some problems with the special
/ communication module interface.
F0026 _ANNUM_ER External device failure Failures are detected from the external
device.
F0028 _BPRM_ER Basic parameters There are some problems with the basic
parameters.
F0029 _IOPRM_ER IO parameters There are some problems with I/O
parameters.
F002A _SPPRM_ER Special module
parameters
Abnormal special module parameters
F002B _CPPRM_ER Communication module
parameters
Abnormal communication module
parameters
F002C _PGM_ER Program error There are some errors with the program.
F002D _CODE_ER Code error There are some errors with the program
code.
F002E _SWDT_ER System Watch dog The system Watchdog works.
F0030 _WDT_ER Scan Watch dog The scan Watchdog works.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-8

 

Word Bit Flag Name Function Description
F004 _CNF_WAR System warning Reports the minor failure status of the
system.
F0041 _DBCK_ER Backup error There are some problems with data
backup.
F0043 _ABSD_ER Shutdown cased by
abnormal operation
Stoppage caused by abnormal operation.
F0046 _ANNUM_WAR External device failure Minor failures are detected from the
external device.
F0048 _HS_WAR1 High speed link1 High speed link – more than parameter1
F0049 _HS_WAR2 High speed link2 High speed link – more than parameter2
F0054 _P2P_WAR1 P2P parameter1 P2P – more than parameter1
F0055 _P2P_WAR2 P2P parameter2 P2P – more than parameter2
F0056 _P2P_WAR3 P2P parameter3 P2P – more than parameter3
F005C _CONSTANT_ER Fixed cycle error Fixed cycle error
F011 _LOGIC_RESULT Logic result Displays the logic result.
F0110 _LER Operational error It Is On during 1 scan in case of
operational error.
F0111 _ZERO Zero flag It is On when the operational result is 0.
F0112 _CARRY CARRY flag It is On when CARRY occurs during
operation.
F0113 _ALL_Off All outputs Off It is On when all outputs are Off.
F0115 _LER_LATCH Operational error latch It maintains 0 in case of operational error.
F015 - _PUTGET_ERR0 PUT/GET error 0 main base PUT / GET error
F023 - _PUTGET_NDR0 PUT/GET completion 0 main base PUT / GET completion
F058 - _ERR_STEP Error step Saves error step.
F060 - _REF_COUNT Refresh Increases when executing module
REFRESH
F062 - _REF_OK_CNT Refresh OK Increases when module REFRESH is
normal.
F064 - _REF_NG_CNT Refresh NG Increases when module REFRESH is
abnormal.
F066 - _REF_LIM_CNT Refresh Limit Increases when module REFRESH is
abnormal. (TIME OUT)
F068 - _REF_ERR_CNT Refresh Error Increases when module REFRESH is
abnormal.
F090 - _IO_TYER_N Mismatch slot Displays the slot number with the
mismatch module type.
F091 - _IO_DEER_N Slot with separated
module
Displays the slot number with the
separated module.
F093 - _IO_RWER_N RW error slot Displays the slot number with module
Read/Write error
F094 - _IP_IFER_N IF error slot Displays the slot number with module
interface error
F096 - _IO_TYER0 Module type 0 error Main base’s module type error
F104 - _IO_DEER0 Module separation 0 error Main base’s module separation error
F120 - _IO_RWER0 Module RW 0 error Main base’s module Read/Write error
F128 - _IO_IFER_0 Module IF 0 error Main base’s module interface error
F202 - _ANC_ERR Information on the
external device’s failure
Displays the information on the external
device’s failure
F203 - _ANC_WAR Information on the
external device’s minor
failure
Displays the information on the external
device’s minor failure

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-9

 

Notice
• For more details on the whole flags, refer to the Appendix 1 Flag Table of the Outline of this manual.

2.3.4 Function to check the expansion module
It is the function to check whether I/O modules work normally during startup and operation. It checks the status of every scan
expansion module and the PLC checks whether the following situations occur.
• In case the module that is different from the set parameter is installed at the time of initial operation or failure is suspected
• In case expansion modules are detached or failure is suspected.
If abnormal conditions are detected, the basic unit’s ERR LED will be flickering and the PLC will be stopped.
2.3.5 Failure Diagnosis Function for the External Device
It is the function to detect the failure of the external device, which connected to the PLC to realize stoppage of the system and
warning easily. Through this function, you can detect the external device’s failure without complex programming and can
monitor the failure position without special devices (XG5000, etc.) or programs.
You can use the failure diagnosis function for the external devices as below.
(1)Failure types of external devices
• The failures of external devices are divided into the two types; failure (error) detected by combination of
user programs and special relay (F area) requires stoppage of the PLC operation; minor failure (warning)
that continues the PLC’s operation and displays the detection status only.
(2) Flag to detect failures of external devices
The following flag types are used to diagnose failures of external devices.

Word Bit Flag Name Function Description
F0202 - _ANC_ERR Information on the external
device’s failures
Input the error code of user-defined
serious failure of external device.
F0203 - _ANC_WAR Information on the external
device’s MINOR failures
Input the error code of user-defined
minor failure of external device.
- F0026 _ANNUM_ER detection of external serious
error
It is On when the external device’s
serious failure occurs.
- F0046 _ANNUM_WAR detection of external slight
error
It is On when the external device’s minor
failure occurs.
- F2002 _CHK_ANC_ERR Request detection of external
serious error
It is the command flag asking to detect
the external device’s serious failure.
- F2003 _CHK_ANC_WAR Request detection of external
slight error minor failure
It is the command flag asking to detect
the external device’s minor failure.

(3) Detecting the external device’s serious failures
The following programs are detecting the external device’s serious failures.
(a) Save the error code that can be distinguished by external device’s serious failures in F202 (_ANC_ERR)
through the FWRITE command as below. (Input the values excluding 0)
(b) In case the external device’s serious failures occur, F2002 (_CHK_ANC_ERR)flag will be On.
(c) When the scan program is completed, the PLC checks whether F2002 (_CHK_ANC_ERR) is ON and
detects serious failures.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-10

(d) If the external device’s serious failures occur, the PLC will be in error status and will stop the operation.
Then, F0026 (_ANNUM_ER) is ON and F2002 flag is automatically Off. All outputs works based on IO
parameter’s emergency output settings.
(e) When failures occur, through XG5000, a user can figure out the causes of failures by monitoring F202
(_ANC_ERR)flag.
(f) The below figure describes the example of the program detecting the external device’s serious failures
with operation details.
<Example of the system configuration and program >
In this example, assume that the input signal to detect the external device’s failures is connected to
the input module of No.5 slot in the system configuration as below.
- In case of the sensor failure, P200 is ON. The error code is the value saved in D0010.
- In case of the motor failure, P201 is ON. The error code is the value saved in D0011.
- When the device 1 is disconnected, P202 is ON. The error code is the value saved in D0012.
• In the above programming, when P20 is On (In case of sensor failure), the value of D0010 is
saved in F202 (_ANC_ERR) and F2002 (_CHK_ANC_ERR) will be On.
• If F2002 is ON, it is detected by the scan end and the external device’s serious failures are
generated.
• You can detect the failure of motor 1, disconnection of device 1 in the same way.
• After accessing to XG5000, a user can check which external devices have failures by verifying the
F202 value and can take follow-up measures.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-11

(4) How to detect the external device’s minor failures
The following programming is used to detect the external device’s minor failures.
(a) Save the warning code that can be distinguished by external device’s minor failures in F203_ANC_WAR
through the FWRITE command as below. (Input the values excluding 0)
(b) In case the external device’s minor failures occur, F2003 (_CHK_ANC_WAR)flag will be On.
(c) When the scan program is completed, the PLC checks whether F2003 (_CHK_ANC_WAR) is ON and
detects minor failures.
(d) If the external device’s minor failures occur, the ERR LED will be flickering at 2 seconds interval and the
PLC will run continuously. Then, F0046 (_ANNUM_WAR) is ON and F2003 flag is automatically Off. All
outputs works based on IO parameter’s emergency output settings.
(e) When minor
failures occur, through XG5000, a user can figure out the causes of failures by monitoring
F203 (_ANC_WAR)flag.
(f) If you input 0 again to F203 (_ANC_WAR) after removing the causes of failures and turn ON F2003
(_CHK_ANC_WAR) again, detection of minor failures is canceled.
(g) The below figure describes the example of the program detecting the external device’s minor failures
with operation details.
< Example of the system configuration and program >
• In this example, assume that the input signal to detect the external device’s minor failures is
connected to the input module of No.5 slot in the system configuration as below.
- In case of the sensor warning, P200 is ON. The warning code is the value saved in D0000.
- In case of the motor warning, P201 is ON. The warning code is the value saved in D0001.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-12

- When the device is warned, P202 is ON. The warning code is the value saved in D0002.
• In the above programming, when P200 is On (in case of sensor failure), the value of D000 is
saved in F203 (_ANC_WAR) and F2003 (_CHK_ANC_WAR)will be On.
• If F2003 is ON, it is detected by the scan end and the external device’s serious failures are
generated.
• You can detect the warnings on motor 1 and device 1 in the same way.
• After accessing to XG5000, a user can check which external devices have minor failures by
verifying the F203 value and can take follow-up measures.
2.4 RTC Function
XBM H’ unit has the clock (RTC) function and the clock keeps working thanks to the battery backup even when the power is
Off. You can use the embedded RTC’s time data for time management such as the system’s operating history or failure
history, etc. The RTC’s current time is updated every scan based on the operation status information flag of the system.
2.4.1 How to use the RTC Function
(1) Read/Set clock data
(a) Read/Set from XG5000
1) Click
Online-Diagnosis- PLC information.
2) Click the PLC clock tab of
PLC information.
3) If you want to transfer the PLC’s time to the PLC, click the PC clock and synchronization button.
4) If you want to set up your preferred time, after changing the set values of the data and time box, click them
to the PLC.
(b) Read with the special relay
You can monitor the data with the special relay as below.

Word Flag Name Name Data Description
F053 _MON_YEAR Clock data (month/year) H0709 July, xx09
F054 _TIME_DAY Clock data (hour/day) h1214 14h.12th
F055 _SEC_MIN Clock data (second/minute) H2040 20 min. 40 sec.
F056 _HUND_WK Clock data (Year/week) H2003 20xx,Wed.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-13

(c) Example of changing the clock data through programs
You can change the clock data through the programs as below.

Area Item Input data Description
D0000 Month/ Year h'0314 Mar./xx14
D0001 Hour/ Day h'1230 12:00/30th
D0002 Second/ Minute h'1130 11 seconds/30 minutes
D0003 Year/ Week h'2000 20xx /Sun.

Input the clock data in the random devices (P,M,K,L,Z,U,D,R) and turn On/Off the DATEWR input contact
M0001.
(If the clock data is not correct except the day of the week, it will not be written. Day of the week data is
automatically corrected and written)
Check whether the data was correctly changed by monitoring the above special areas (F053~F056).
(d) How to express the day

No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Day Sun. Mon. Tue. Wed. Thu. Fri. Sat.

(2) Time error
The RTC’s error is different depending on the service temperature.

temperature max error(sec/day) normal condition(sec/day)
0 -4.67 ~ 1.56 -1.55
25 -3.11 ~ 1.96 0.58
55 -10.37 ~ -1.56 -5.97

 

Notice
• The clock data may not be stated in the shipped product so you need to set up the clock data correctly before use.
• If you write unserviceable clock data in the RTC, it will not work properly.
Ex.) 25:00, 32th, 14 month
• In case the RTC stops or error occurs due to a battery failure, if you write the new clock data in the RTC, the error
will be cleared.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-14

2.5 Timer counter function
2.5.1 Timer Function
The XGB’s timer is the additional timer increasing the current value depending on the measuring time. There are 5
available timer types; On delay timer (TON), Off delay timer (TOFF), Cumulative (TMR), Monostable (TMON),
retriggerble (TRTG).
The measurable time ranges by timers are as below.

100ms timer 10ms timer 1ms timer
Range 0.1 seconds ~ 6553.5
seconds
0.01 seconds ~ 655.35
seconds
0.001 seconds ~ 65.535
seconds

(1) Updating the current value of On delay timer and contact On/Off
If the input contact is On, the current value starts to increase. When the current value reaches the set time (PT)
(current value=set value), the timer’s output contact (Txxx) will be On. When the input contact is Off while the
current value increases, the timer’s current value will be 0. The timing chart of the On delay timer is as below.
Startup
contact
Timer current
value
Timer's Set
value
Timer output
contact
Timer type Timer contact No. Timer setting value
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-15

(2) Updating the current value of Off delay timer and contact On/Off
If the input condition is On, the timer’s output contact (Txxx)is On and the current value becomes the set
value. When the input contact is Off, the current value starts to decrease and if the elapse time reaches the set
time (PT (current value=0), the timer’s output contact (Txxx) will be Off. If the input contact is On while the
current value decreases, the current value becomes the set value.
The timing chart of the Off delay timer is as below.
Startup
contact
Timer current
value
Timer's Set
value
Timer output
contact
(3) Updating the current value of Cumulative timer and contact On/Off
The current value increases only when the input contact is On and if the cumulative value reaches the timer’s
et time (PT), timer output contact is on. The timer output contact maintains the On status until it is Off by the
reset coil (IL : RST command). The timing chart of the Cumulative timer is as below.
Startup
contact
Timer current
value
Timer's Set
value
Timer output
contact
RST commend
(4) Updating the current value of Monostable timer and contact On/Off
If the input condition is On, the timer’s output contact (Txxx) is On. When the timer’s current value starts to
decrease from the set value (PT) and it becomes 0, the output contact is Off. The change of On/Off of the input
contact is regarded until the current value reaches 0. The timing chart of the Monostable timer is as below.
Startup
contact
Timer current
value
Timer output
contact
Timer's Set
value

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-16

(5) Updating the current value of retriggerble timer and contact On/Off
If the input condition is On, the timer’s (Txxx) is On.
When the timer’s current value starts to decrease from the set value (PV) and it becomes 0, the output contact
is Off. Before the timer’s current value becomes “0’, the input contact is Off
On again, the timer’s current value
is updated to the initial set value again. The timing chart of the retriggerble timer is as below.
Startup
contact
Timer current
value
Timer's Set
value
Timer output
contact

Notice
• The timer’s current value and output processing are executed in the scan END so the maximum error is as below.
Max. error : 1 scan time + Executing time from the startup of the scan to the timer command step
• For more details on how to use the timer command, refer to the XGB command manual.

2.5.2 Counter Function
The CPU part’s counter detects the input signal’s rising edge (OffOn) and increases·decreases the current value.
XGB PLC supports 4 kinds of counter commands; additional counter (CTU), subtractive counter
(CTD),additional·subtractive counter (CTUD),ring counter (CTR).
The additional counter increases the current value.
The subtractive counter decreases the current value.
The additional·subtractive counter increases or decreases the current value depending on the 2 input
conditions.
The ring counter increases the current value and renews the current value as “0” whenever the current value
becomes the set value.
(1) Updating the counter’s current value and contact On/Off
(a) Additional counter
It increases the current value under the rising edge of the input condition.
When the current value increases and becomes the same as the set value, the counter’s output contact
(Cxxx) is On.
The current value is “0” and the output contact (Cxxx) is Off while the reset signal is On.
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-17

(b) Subtractive counter
It decreases the current value of the rising edge of the input condition.
When the current value decreases and becomes “0”, the counter’s output contact (Cxxx) is On.
The current value is “0” and the output contact (Cxxx) is Off while the reset signal is On.
(c) Additional ·subtractive counter
The current value increases under the rising edge of the additional input condition and the current value
decreases under the rising edge of the subtractive input condition. When the current value is greater than
or equal to the set value, the output contact Cxxx is On. The current value is smaller than or equal to the
set value, the output contact Cxxx is Off.
The current value becomes 0 in case of reset signal input.
(d) Ring counter
The current value increases by 1 under the rising edge of the input condition. After the current value
reaches the set value, the current value becomes 0 under the rising edge of the next input condition.
When the current value is the set value, output contact Cxxx is On. Under the rising edge of the next input
condition or the rising edge of the reset condition, output contact Cxxx is Off.
During counting the ring counter, it the reset condition is input, the current value becomes 0.
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-18

(2) Counter’s maximum counting speed
The counter’s maximum counting speed is determined by the scan time. only when On/Off time of the input
condition is greater than the scan time, it can be countable.
The duty (n) puts the input signal’s On, Off time ratio on a percentage basis

Notice
• You are recommended to use the high speed counter function to count the high speed’s input pulse accurately
that cannot be counted with the counter command

Max. counting speed
)
t
1
(
100
n
C
S
max
= ×
n :Duty (%)
t S : scan time[s]
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-19

2.6 Remote Function
In XGB basic unit, you can change the operation mode through the key switch attached to the module or through
communication. For remote operation, put the basic unit’s mode change switch on STOP position.
(1) The kinds of remote operations are as below.
•Access to XG5000 and operation through the USB port installed in the basic unit
•You can operate the other PLCs connected to the network by using the PLC’s communication functions when XG5000 is
connected to the basic unit.
• You can control the PLC’s operation status with HMI software, etc. though the dedicated communication
(2) Remote RUN/STOP
•It is the function to execute RUN/STOP through communication modules through the outside.
•This convenient function can be helpfully used when the PLC is installed in the bad palace to operate or you
need to RUN/STOP the CPU modules of a control panel from the outside.
(3) Remote DEBUG
•It is the function to execute DEBUG when the operation mode switch is on STOP position. DEBUG is the
function to execute the program operation based on the specified operating conditions.
• This convenient function can be helpfully used when you need to check the program’s progress or each data’s
details during the system’s debugging works.
(4) Remote reset
•It is the function to reset the CPU module by remote control when errors occur.
•'Reset' and ‘Overall Reset’ are available.

Notice
• For more details on how to operate the remote functions, refer to ‘Chap.10 Online’ of the XG5000 manual.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-20

2.7 I/O forced On/Off Functions
The forced I/O function is used to turn On/Off I/O areas by force regardless of the results of program execution.
2.7.1 Forced I/O setting method
ClickOnline-Forced I/O setting .
The below table represents the items related to the forced I/O setting.

Item Description Remarks
Movement of address You can select the base and slot.
Apply You can set the forced input and output Enable / Unable
Individual Data You can set the forced I/O Enable / Unable by bit.
Flag You can set the forced I/O data (On/Off) by bit.
View
variables/comments
You can check the set input, output variables.
Select All You can set the forced I/O Enable under the condition that the whole I/O
areas are On.
Delete All You can delete the forced I/O Enable under the condition that the whole I/O
areas are Off.
Set device It displays the I/O area where even one bit is set.

2.7.2 Time to process the forced I/O On / Off and processing method
(1) Forced input
When the forced input is set, among the data read from the input model at the time of Refresh, the data of the contact set as the
forced On/Off is replaced by the forced set data to update the input image area. Accordingly, during program operation, among
the actual input data, the forced set area is operated with the results replaced by the forced set data.
(2) Forced output
After completing the operation of user programs, at the time of output Refresh, among the data of the output

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-21

image areas including the operation results, the data of the contact set as the forced On/Off is replaced by the
forced set data, and then, they are output. Accordingly, in contrast with the forced input, in the case of the
forced output, the data of the output image area shows the same data with the program operation results but
the actual output changes by the forced output On/Off settings.
(3) Instructions to use the Forced I/O functions
• It works from the time of setting each I/O ‘Enable’ after setting the forced data.
• Although the actual I/O modules are not equipped, the forced input can be set.
• In spite of Off-> On of the power, change of operation modes and operation by the reset key
The previously set On/Off data is stored in the PLC.
• Even in STOP mode, the forced input and output data is not eliminated.
• When you try to set the new data from the beginning, cancel all settings of I/O by using ‘Delete All’ before use.
(4) Operations in case of errors
•When errors occur after setting the forced output, it works based on
Output Hold when errors occurof
output control settings in the basic parameters and
Emergency Outputof the I/O parameters. In case of
error occurrence, if you select the emergency output as
Clearafter setting Output Hold when errors
occur
, the output is off when errors occur; if you choose Hold, the output status will be maintained.
• In case
Output Hold when errors occuris not set in the output control setting of the basic parameters,
the output is Off.
2.8 Direct I/O Operation Function
I/O contact’s Refresh is executed after the scan program is finished. Accordingly, the data of the I/O contact that
changes during execution of programs is refreshed to the I/O data of when the END command is executed instead
of being refreshed when the data changes.
If you need to immediately refresh the I/O data during execution of the program, through ‘IORF’ command, you can
directly read the input contact status for operation or can directly print out the operation results in the output contact.
The below figure indicates the example of the direct I/O operation through the IORF command.
When M00000 is On, the IORF’ command is executed and the first operand specifies the slot number. The second
operand is the mask data of the upper 32 bits, the third operand is the mask data of the lower 32 bits. You need to set
the bit to be refreshed as ‘1’. The bit set as ‘0’ is not refreshed.

Notice
• When you read and write the data in the expansion module through the IORF command, it takes approximately
1~2ms. Accordingly, if the IORF command is used in the fixed cycle task or the external interrupt task program that
is input at a short interval, task conflict may occur.
• For more details on the IORF command, refer to the XGK/XGB command manuals.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-22

2.9 Function saving the operation history
There are 4 types of operation history; error history, mode conversion history, power down history and system history. The occurrence
time, frequency, operating details of each event are saved in the memory and you can conveniently monitor the data through XG5000.
The operation history is saved in the PLC unless it is deleted through XG5000.
2.9.1 Error history
It saves the error history occurred during operation.
The error code, date, time, error details are saved.
The histories can be saved up to 100 EA.
It is automatically canceled when the memory backup is cleared due to the battery’s low voltage, etc.
2.9.2 Mode conversion history
It saves the information on the changed mode and time when changing the operation mode.
It saves the data, time, mode conversion details.
The histories can be saved up to 100 EA.
2.9.3 Power down history
On or Off time of the power is saved as the ON/OFF information.
ON/OFF information, date and time are saved.
The histories can be saved up to 100 EA.
2.9.4 System history
It saves the operation history of the system occurred during operation.
The date, time and details of operation changes are saved.
The histories related to system operation are saved; XG5000 operation information, change of the key switch position, etc.
The histories can be saved up to 100 EA.
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-23

2.10 How to allocate I/O No.
Allocation of I/O No. is to allocate the address to each module’s I/O terminals to read the data from the input modules and
output the data in the output modules when executing operation. In the XGB PLC, all modules occupy 64 points.
(1) Allocation of I/O No.
The basic unit occupies 2 slots of No.1 so 128 points are allocated and all remaining expansion module occupies
64 points. (including special, communication modules)

Example of allocating I/O No. based on the system configuration
Slot No. Model I/O allocation Remakrs
0 XBC-DN32HP input : P0000 ~ P001F
output : P0020 ~ P003F
Fixed as the basic unit
1 Embedded special
functions
P0040~P007F -
2 XBE-DC32A input : P0080~P011F Actual input : P0080 ~ P009F
3 XBE-TN32A output : P0120 ~ P015F Actual output : P0120 ~ P013F
4 XBL-C21A P0160 ~ P019F -
5 XBF-AD04A P0200 ~ P023F -
6 XBF-DV04A P0240 ~ P027F -
7 XBE-DC32A input : P0280 ~ P031F Actual input : P0280 ~ P029F
8 XBE-TN32A output : P0320 ~ P035F Actual output : P0320 ~ P033F

* The number of empty I/O points can be used as the internal relay.
* In the case of the high performance XGB basic type, it does not have the embedded special function corresponding to No.1
slot but occupies No.1 slot as an empty slot.
(2) When the I/O of the I/O parameter is allocated, the allocation information is displayed.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-24

2.11 Modification Procedures during RUN
Program Modification during operation (Modification during RUN)
You can modify the programs and communication parameters without stopping control operations during running the
PLC. The below describes the basic modification method. For more details on Modification during RUN, refer to the
XG5000 manual.
The items that can be modified during RUN are limited to programs, network parameters.
You cannot modify adding tasks, deletion, parameters, etc. during RUN.
(1) It shows the currently running program.
(2) Click
Online-Start Modification Online Editing.
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-25

(3) Then, the background color of the program window changes and it is converted into the mode of modification
during RUN.
(4) You can modify the program.
(5) When the modification of the program is completed, click
Online-Write Modified Program
Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-26

(6) When Write Program is completed, click Online-End Online Editing.
(7) The background color of the program window changes into the original one and modification during RUN is
completed.

Notice
• For Modification of communication parameters during RUN, after changing the network configuration items of
XG5000 in the RUN status without going into the Modification during RUN menu, click
Online-Writeand
choose ‘Network Parameter’ to execute Write.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-27

2.12 Read I/O information
It is the function to monitor each module’s information comprising the XGB PLC system.
(1) If you click
Online-I/O Information, the information of each module of connected systems will be
monitored.
(2) If you click ‘Detailed Information’ after choosing the module, the details on the module will be displayed.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-28

2.13 Monitoring Functions
It is the function to monitor the XGB PLC system’s general information.
(1) If you click
Monitor, the submenu will be displayed as below.
(2) The below table provides the descriptions on each item.

Items Descriptions Remarks
Start/End monitor Specifies the startup and end of the monitor. Changes every time you click
Pause Suspends the monitor.
Resume Executes the suspended monitor again.
Pausing Conditions It is the function to suspend the monitor when the set
device’s value is matched with the conditions.
Restarts when you click
‘Restart Monitor’
Change the Current value Changes the currently selected device’s current value.
System Monitoring Monitors the current system’s general information.
Device Monitoring It is the function to monitor each device.
Trend Monitoring Monitors the set device’s trend. For more details, refer to the
XG-5000 manual.
Custom Events by a user occurs. Monitors the set device’s value when the event specified
Data Trace Traces the set device’s value.

(a) Changing the current value
It is the function to change the current value of each selected device in the program window.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-29

(b) Device monitor
It is the monitoring function by device.
(c) Monitor suspension setting
It is the function to stop monitoring when the set device value is matched.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-30

(d) Trend Monitor
It is the function to represent the set device value in a graphic form. The value represented on the graph is
not the data collected by the PLC at the right timing but the value read from XG5000 through the
communication function. Accordingly, communication delay can occur so it may not be matched with the actual
data collected at the right cycle.
You are recommended to use the Trend Monitor function to check the rough data trend.
(e) Custom event
1) It is the function to monitor the detailed information when the event set by a user occurs.
Register the user event additionally.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-31

2) Establish the basic settings and related device.
In case the rising edge of M0000 device occur, the Alarm message “Tank 1 Error-> Check” is recorded with
the then values of D0000,L0000,D0100,N1000 devices.
3) Set up the associated device.
4) It monitors the user event history.
5) If you double-click the occurrence number, the detailed value of the device at the time of occurrence will be
monitored with the details as below.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-32

 

Notice
• For more details on the monitor, refer to the XG5000 manual.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-33

2.14 PLC’s Read-Protect Function
The PLC’s Read-Protect function is the function to prohibit the upload of comment, parameter, program downloaded to the PLC. If this
function is set up, the use of the functions such as Open from PLC, Read PLC, Compare with PLC, etc. are restricted.
(1) How to set up the PLC’s Read-Protect function
(a) Click
Online-Write.
(b) If you choose the program among the items of Write, ‘[Stop]Program Upload Prohibit’will be activated.
(c) Then, choose ‘[Stop]Program Upload Prohibit’ and click the OK button.
(2) When you try to read the PLC under thecondition that the ‘[Stop]Program Upload Prohibit’function is set up, the below dialog box will
pop up. Reading is not available in the PLC where ‘Read-Protect’ is set although the password is cleared. Namely, you cannot read the
PLC in any way until a new program is applied.
(3) How to cancel the PLC’s ‘[Stop]Program Upload Prohibit’ function
(a) Click
Online-Write.
(b) Cancel ‘‘[Stop]Program Upload Prohibit’’ and click the OK button.

Main
Chapter 2 CPU Function

2-34

2.15 Function to delete all of the PLC
The function to delete all of PLC is the initialization function to delete all programs, parameters, passwords, data stored
in the PLC.
(1) How to delete all of PLC
(a) Click
Online-Delete all of PLC .
(b) If you choose
Yesin the dialog box, the window for selecting the connection method with the PLC to be
deleted is created.
(c) After choosing the connection method with the PLC to be deleted, if you click
Accessor OK, all
PLC programs, parameters, data, passwords will be deleted.

Notice
• Although the initial PLC is not connected, the function is executed. You can connect to the PLC after assess
setting.
• If you use the function to delete all of PLC, all PLCs’ internal data including passwords will be completely deleted
so be careful of this.
• If you use the function to delete all of PLC when the password is lost, it is possible to connect to the PLC so you
can reuse the PLC.

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-1

Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications
3.1 Introduction
Here describes the notices when selecting digital I/O module used for XGB series.
(1) For the type of digital input, there are two types such as current sink input and current source input.
(2) The number of max. Simultaneous input contact point is different according to module type. It depends on the input voltage,
ambient temperature. Use input module after checking the specification.
(3) When response to high speed input is necessary, use interrupt input contact point. Up to 8 interrupt points are supported.
(4) In case that open/close frequency is high or it is used for conductive load open/close, use Transistor output module or triac output
module as the durability of Relay Output Module shall be reduced.
(5) For output module to run the conductive (L) load, max. open/close frequency should be used by 1second On, 1 second Off.
(6) For output module, in case that counter timer using DC/DC Converter as a load was used, Inrush current may flow in a certain
cycle when it is ON or during operation. In this case, if average current is selected, it may cause the failure. Accordingly, if the
previous load was used, it is recommended to connect resistor or inductor to the load in serial in order to reduce the impact of Inrush
current or use the large module having a max. load current value.

Output
module

Resistor Load

Output
module

Inductor Load
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-2

(7) Relay life of Relay output module is shown as below.
(Max. life of Relay used in Relay output module is shown as below.)
(8) Relay life graph is based on real use.
(This is not a guaranteed value). So consider margin. Relay life is specified under following condition.
(a) Rated voltage, load: 3 million times: 100 million times
(b) 200V AC 1.5A, 240V AC 1A (COS¢ =0.7): 1 million times
(c) 200V AC 0.4A, 240V AC 0.3A (COS¢ =0.7): 3 million times
(d) 200V AC 1A, 240V AC 0.5A (COS¢ =0.35): 1 million times
(e) 200V AC 0.3A, 240V AC 0.15A (COS¢ =0.35): 3 million times
(f) 24V DC 1A, 100V DC 0.1A (L/R=7ms): 1million times
(g) 24V DC 0.3A, 100V DC 0.03A (L/R=7ms): 3million times
Open/Close times (× 10000)
100
50
30
20
10
0.5 1 2 3 5 10 100
Open/Close current (A)

C 2 V Resist e l ad
C 3 esistiv lo d

AC 125V Resistive load
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-3

(9) A clamped terminal with sleeve can not be used for the XGB terminal strip. The clamped terminals suitable for terminal strip are
as follows (JOR 1.25-3:Daedong Electricity in Korea).
(10) The cable size connected to a terminal strip should be 0.3~0.75
stranded cable and 2.8 thick. The cable may have
different current allowance depending on the insulation thickness.
(11) The coupling torque available for fixation screw and terminal strip screw should follow the table below.

Coupling position Coupling torque range
IO module terminal strip screw (M3 screw) 42 ~ 58 Nꞏ
IO module terminal strip fixation screw
(M3 screw)
66 ~ 89 Nꞏ

(12) Noise can be inserted into input module. To prevent this noise, the user can set filter for input delay in parameter. Consider the
environment and set the input filter time.

Input filter time (ms) Noise signal pulse size (ms) Reference
1 0.3
3 1.8
5 3
10 6
20 12
70 45
100 60

6.0mm or less 6.0mm or less
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-4

3.2 Main Unit Digital Input Specifications
3.2.1 XBM-DN32H2/HP, XBM-DP32H2/HP 16 point DC24V input (Source/Sink type)

Model
Specification
Main unit
XBM-DN32H2/XBM-DN32HP, XBM-DP32H2/XBM-DP32HP
Input point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4(Contact point 0~3: about 5)
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (within ripple rate 5%)
On voltage / On current DC19V or higher / 3or higher(Contact point 0~3: 3.5or higher)
Off voltage / Off current DC6V or lower / 1or lower
Input resistance About 5.6(P00~P03: about 4.7)
Response
time
Off On 1/3/5/10/20/70/100(Set by I/O parameter) Default: 3
On Off
Insulation pressure AC850Vrms / 3 cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10or more by MegOhmMeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3~0.75
Operation indicator LED On when Input On
External connection method 40point terminal connector
Weight 134g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 20 DC24V
5
0
Terminal block no.
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
B19 01 A19 21
B18 02 A18 22
B17 03 A17 23
B16 04 A16 24
B15 05 A15 25
B14 06 A14 26
B13 07 A13 27
B12 08 A12 28
B11 09 A11 29
B10 0A A10 2A
B9 0B A9 2B
B8 0C A8 2C
B7 0D A7 2D
B6 0E A6 2E
B5 0F A5 2F
B4 NC A4 P
B3 NC A3 P
B2 IN_
COM
A2 OUT_ COM
B1 IN_
COM
A1 OUT_ COM

Internal
circuit
R
B20
COM
Photo coupler
B5
B02
R

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-5

3.3 Main Unit Digital Output Specifications
3.3.1 XBM-DN32H2/HP 16 point transistor output (Sink type)

Model
Specification
Main unit
XBM-DN32H2/XBM-DN32HP
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12/24V
Operation load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max.load
current
XBM-DN32H2 0.5A / 1 point, position (P20~P23) 0.1A/1 point 2A / 1COM
XBM-DN32HP 0.5A / 1 point, position (P20~P2B) 0.1A/1 point 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10㎳ or less
Max. voltage drop when On DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber TVS diode
Response
time
Off On 1㎳ or less
On Off 1㎳ or less (rated load, resistive load)
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper wire size Stranded wire 0.3~0.75㎟ (external diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
External power Voltage DC12/24V 10% (Ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 80㎃ or less (When connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator LED On when Output On
External connection method 40 point terminal block connector
Weight 134g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 20 B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
B19 01 A19 21
B18 02 A18 22
B17 03 A17 23
B16 04 A16 24
B15 05 A15 25
B14 06 A14 26
B13 07 A13 27
B12 08 A12 28
B11 09 A11 29
B10 0A A10 2A
B9 0B A9 2B
B8 0C A8 2C
B7 0D A7 2D
B6 0E A6 2E
B5 0F A5 2F
B4 NC A4 P
B3 NC A3 P
B2 IN_CO
M
A2 OUT_ COM
B1 IN_CO
M
A1 OUT_ COM

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-6

3.3.2 XBM-DP32H2/HP 16 point transistor output (Source type)

Model
Specification
Main unit
XBM-DP32H2/XBM-DP32HP
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12/24V
Operation load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max.load
current
XBM-DP32H2 0.5A / 1 point, position (P20~P23) 0.1A/1 point 2A / 1COM
XBM-DP32HP 0.5A / 1 point, position (P20~P2B) 0.1A/1 point 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10㎳ or less
Max. voltage drop when On DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber TVS diode
Response
time
Off On 1㎳ or less
On Off 1㎳ or less (rated load, resistive load)
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper wire size Stranded wire 0.3~0.75㎟ (external diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
External power Voltage DC12/24V 10% (Ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 50㎃ or less (When connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator LED On when Output On
External connection method 40 point terminal block connector
Weight 140g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 20 B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
B19 01 A19 21
B18 02 A18 22
B17 03 A17 23
B16 04 A16 24
B15 05 A15 25
B14 06 A14 26
B13 07 A13 27
B12 08 A12 28
B11 09 A11 29
B10 0A A10 2A
B9 0B A9 2B
B8 0C A8 2C
B7 0D A7 2D
B6 0E A6 2E
B5 0F A5 2F
B4 NC A4 OUT_
COM
B3 NC A3 OUT_
COM
B2 IN_CO
M
A2 N
B1 IN_CO
M
A1 N

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-7

3.4 Digital Input Specifications
3.4.1 8 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type)

Model
Specification
DC input module
XBE-DC08A
Input point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4㎃
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1㎃ or less
Input resistance About 5.6㏀
Response
time
Off On 1/3/5/10/20/70/100㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3㎳
On Off
Insulation pressure AC850Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10㏁ or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded pair 0.3~0.75㎟ (External diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 30㎃ (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 10 point terminal block connector
Weight 52 g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0 TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB09
TB10
DC24V
7
0
Terminal block no.
TB2 1
TB3 2
TB4 3
TB5 4
TB6 5
TB7 6
TB8 7
TB9 COM
TB10 COM

Internal
circuit
R
TB1
COM
Photo coupler
TB8
TB9
R

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-8

3.4.2 16 point DC24V input module (Sink/Source type)

Model
Specification
DC input module
XBE-DC16A XBE-DC16B
Input point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V DC12/24V
Rated input current About 4㎃ About 4/8㎃
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V
(ripple rate < 5%)
DC9.5~30V (ripple rate < 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher DC9V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1㎃ or less DC5V or less / 1㎃ or less
Input resistance About 5.6㏀ About 2.7㏀
Response
time
Off On 1/3/5/10/20/70/100㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3㎳
On Off
Insulation pressure AC850Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10㏁ or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75㎟ (External diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 40㎃ (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector
Weight 53 g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0 TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB09
TB10
TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB2 1
TB3
2
TB4 3
TB5 4
TB6 5
TB7 6
TB8 7
TB1 8
TB2 9
TB3 A
TB4 B
TB5 C
TB6 D
TB7 E
TB8 F
TB9 COM
TB10 COM
DC24V
7
0
TB1
COM
TB8
TB9
Internal
circuit
Photo coupler
Terminal block no.

R
R

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-9

3.4.3 32 point DC24V input module (Source/Sink type)

Model
Specification
DC input module
XBE-DC32A
Input point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4㎃
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
Input Derating Refer to Derating diagram
On Voltage/Current DC 19V or higher / 3 ㎃ or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC 6V or less / 1 ㎃ or less
Input resistance About 5.6㏀
Response
time
Off On 1/3/5/10/20/70/100㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default:3㎳
On Off
Insulation pressure AC 850Vrms / 3 Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10㏁ or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 32 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3㎟
Current consumption 50㎃ (when all point On)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 40 pin connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 10 DC28.8V
DC24V
0
Terminal block no.
100
80
60
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55

On rate (%)
Ambient temperature
(℃)
90
70
50
Input Derating diagram
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
B19 01 A19 11
B18 02 A18 12
B17 03 A17 13
B16 04 A16 14
B15 05 A15 15
B14 06 A14 16
B13 07 A13 17
B12 08 A12 18
B11 09 A11 19
B10 0A A10 1A
B09 0B A09 1B
B08 0C A08 1C
B07 0D A07 1D
B06 0E A06 1E
B05 0F A05 1F
B04 NC A04 NC
B03 NC A03 NC
B02 COM A02 COM
B01 COM A01 COM

Internal
circuit
R
B20
COM
Photo coupler
A05
B02
R

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-10

3.5 Digital Output Specifications
3.5.1 8 point relay output module

Model
Specification
Relay output module
XBE-RY08A
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load voltage / Current DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS= 1), 5A/COM
Min. load voltage/Current DC5V / 1㎃
Max. load voltage/Current AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ (AC220V, 60㎐)
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Service life Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Electrical Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS= 0.7) 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS= 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7㎳) 100,000 times or more
Response
time
Off On 10㎳ or less
On Off 12㎳ or less
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75㎟ (External diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 230㎃ (when all point On)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 9 point terminal block connector
Weight 80g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0 TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
Terminal block no.
TB2 1
TB3 2
TB4 3
TB5 4
TB6 5
TB7 6
TB8 7
TB9 COM

DC5V
Internal RY
TB1
TB9
TB8

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-11

3.5.2 8 point relay output module (Independent point)

Model
Specification
Relay output module
XBE-RY08B
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load voltage / Current DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS= 1), 2A/COM
Min. load voltage/Current DC5V / 1㎃
Max. load voltage/Current AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ (AC220V, 60㎐)
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Service life Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Electrical Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS= 0.7) 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS= 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7㎳) 100,000 times or more
Response
time
Off On 10㎳ or less
On Off 12㎳ or less
Common method 1 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75㎟ (External diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 230㎃ (when all point On)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 9 point terminal block connector x 2
Weight 81g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No.
TB1 0 TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
Terminal no.
TB2 COM0
TB3 1
TB4 COM1
TB5 2
TB6 COM2
TB7 3
TB8 COM3
TB9 NC
TB1 4
TB2 COM4
TB3 5
TB4 COM5
TB5 6
TB6 COM6
TB7 7
TB8 COM7
TB9 NC

RY
Internal
circuit
TB1
DC5V
TB7
TB2
RY TB8
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-12

3.5.3 16 point relay output module

Model
Specification
Relay output module
XBE-RY16A
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load voltage/ current DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS= 1), 5A/COM
Min. load voltage/current DC5V / 1
Max. load voltage/current AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1(AC220V, 60)
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Service life Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Electrical Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS= 0.7) 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS= 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7) 100,000 times or more
Response
time
Off On 10or less
On Off 12or less
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75(External diameter 2.8or less)
Current consumption 420(when all point On)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 9 point terminal block connector x 2 ea
Weight 130g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0 Terminal block no. TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
TB2 1
TB3 2
TB4 3
TB5 4
TB6 5
TB7 6
TB8 7
TB9 COM
TB1 8
TB2 9
TB3 A
TB4 B
TB5 C
TB6 D
TB7 E
TB8 F
TB9 COM

Internal RY
TB1
TB9
TB8
DC5V
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-13

3.5.4 8 point transistor output module (Sink type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-TN08A
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.5A / 1 point
Off leakage current 0.1or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Response
time
Off On 1or less
On Off 1or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75(External diameter 2.8or less)
Current consumption 40(when all point On)
External
power supply
Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 10or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 10 point terminal block connector
Weight 52g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB01 0 TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB09
TB10
Terminal block no.
DC12/24V
TB01
TB02 1
TB03 2
TB04 3
TB05 4
TB06 5
TB07 6
TB08 7
TB09 DC12
/24V
TB10 COM
R
DC5V

Internal
circuit
TB09
TB08
TB10

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-14

3.5.5 16 point transistor output module (Sink type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-TN16A
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Response time Off On 1or less
On Off 1or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75(External diameter 2.8or less)
Current consumption 60(when all point On)
External power
supply
Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 10or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector
Weight 54 g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB01 0 no. TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB09
TB10
TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB02 1
TB03 2
TB04 3
TB05 4
TB06 5
TB07 6
TB08 7
TB01 8
TB02 9
TB03 A
TB04 B
TB05 C
TB06 D
TB07 E
TB08 F
TB09 DC12
/24V
TB10 COM

Terminal block DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
TB01
TB09
TB08
TB10
DC5V

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-15

3.5.6 32 point transistor output module (Sink type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-TN32A
Output point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ or less
Max. inrush current 0.7A / 10㎳ or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Response time Off On 1㎳ or less
On Off 1㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 32 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3㎟
Current consumption 120㎃ (when all point On)
External power
supply
Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 20㎃or less (DC24V connection)
Operation indicator Output On, LED On
External connection method 40 pin connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contac
t
No. Contac
t
Type
B20 00 A20 10 B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
Terminal block no.
DC12/24V
B19 01 A19 11
B18 02 A18 12
B17 03 A17 13
B16 04 A16 14
B15 05 A15 15
B14 06 A14 16
B13 07 A13 17
B12 08 A12 18
B11 09 A11 19
B10 0A A10 1A
B09 0B A09 1B
B08 0C A08 1C
B07 0D A07 1D
B06 0E A06 1E
B05 0F A05 1F
B04 NC A04 NC
B03 NC A03 NC
B02 DC12/
24V
A02 COM
B01 A01

R
Internal
circuit
B20
B01,B02
A05
A01,A02
DC5V
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-16

3.5.7 8 point transistor output module (Source type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-TP08A
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.5A / 1 point
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10㎳ or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Response
time
Off On 1㎳ or less
On Off 1㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75㎟ (external diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 40㎃ (when all outputs are on)
External
power
Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 10㎃ or less (when connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator LED on when output on
External connection method 10 pin terminal block connector
Weight 30g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB01 0 TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB09
TB10
Terminal bloc
k no.
TB02 1
TB03 2
TB04 3
TB05 4
TB06 5
TB07 6
TB08 7
TB09 COM
TB10 0V

DC5V
R
Internal
circuit
TB09
TB10
TB01
TB08

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-17

3.5.8 16 point transistor output module (Source type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-TP16A
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.5A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Response time Off On 1or less
On Off 1or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75(external diameter 2.8or less)
Current consumption 60(When all outputs are on)
External
power
Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 10or less (connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator LED On when output On
External connection method 8 pin terminal block connector + 10 pin terminal block connector
Weight 40g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB01 0 Terminal bloc
k no.
TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB09
TB10
TB01
TB02
TB03
TB04
TB05
TB06
TB07
TB08
TB02 1
TB03 2
TB04 3
TB05 4
TB06 5
TB07 6
TB08 7
TB01 8
TB02 9
TB03 A
TB04 B
TB05 C
TB06 D
TB07 E
TB08 F
TB09 COM
TB10 0V

DC5V
DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
(2
(26)
TB09
(2
TB10
TB010
TB08

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-18

3.5.9 32 point transistor output module (Source type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-TP32A
Output point 32 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated load voltage DC 12 / 24V
Load voltage range DC 10.2 ~ 26.4V
Max. load voltage 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ or less
Max. inrush current 4A / 10 ㎳ or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber Zener Diode
Response time Off On 1㎳ or less
On Off 1㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 32 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3㎟
Current consumption 120㎃ (When all outputs are on)
External power Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 20㎃ or less (connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator LED On when output On
External connection method 40 pin connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 10 B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
Connector N
o.
B19 01 A19 11
B18 02 A18 12
B17 03 A17 13
B16 04 A16 14
B15 05 A15 15
B14 06 A14 16
B13 07 A13 17
B12 08 A12 18
B11 09 A11 19
B10 0A A10 1A
B09 0B A09 1B
B08 0C A08 1C
B07 0D A07 1D
B06 0E A06 1E
B05 0F A05 1F
B04 NC A04 NC
B03 NC A03 NC
B02 COM A02 0V
B01 A01

DC5V
DC12/24V
R
Internal
circuit
(3
(29)
B02,B01
(2
A02,A01
B20
A05

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-19

3.6 Combined Digital I/O module Input Specification
3.6.1 8 point DC24V input (Source/Sink type)

Model
Specification
DC input module
XBE-DR16A
Input point 8 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4㎃
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (within ripple rate 5%)
On Voltage/Current DC19V or higher / 3㎃ or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC6V or less / 1㎃ or less
Input resistance About 5.6㏀
Response
time
Off On 1/3/5/10/20/70/100㎳ (set by CPU parameter) Default: 3㎳
On Off
Insulation pressure AC560Vrms / 3Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10㏁ or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75㎟ (External diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 280㎃ (When all inputs and outputs are on)
Operation indicator LED on when input on
External connection method 9 pin terminal block connector
Weight 81g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0 DC24V
7
0
Terminal bloc
k no.
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
TB2 1
TB3 2
TB4 3
TB5 4
TB6 5
TB7 6
TB8 7
TB9 COM

Internal
circuit
R
TB1
COM
(32)
Photo coupler
TB8
TB9
(31)
R

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-20

3.6.2 16 point DC24V input (Source/Sink type)

Model
Specification
DC input module
XBE-DN32A
Input point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated input voltage DC24V
Rated input current About 4
Operation voltage range DC20.4~28.8V (ripple rate < 5%)
Input Derating Refer to Derating diagram
On Voltage/Current DC 19V or higher / 3 or higher
Off Voltage/Current DC 6V or less / 1 or less
Input resistance About 5.6
Response
time
Off On 1/3/5/10/20/70/100(set by CPU parameter) Default:3
On Off
Insulation pressure AC 560Vrms / 3 Cycle (altitude 2000m)
Insulation resistance 10or more by Megohmmeter
Common method 16 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3
Current consumption 60(When all inputs and outputs are on)
Operation indicator Input On, LED On
External connection method 40 pin connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contact No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 20 DC28.8V
DC24V
0
Terminal block no.
100
80
60
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 55

On rate (%)
Ambient temperature
(℃)
90
70
50
Input Derating diagram
B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
B19 01 A19 21
B18 02 A18 22
B17 03 A17 23
B16 04 A16 24
B15 05 A15 25
B14 06 A14 26
B13 07 A13 27
B12 08 A12 28
B11 09 A11 29
B10 0A A10 2A
B09 0B A09 2B
B08 0C A08 2C
B07 0D A07 2D
B06 0E A06 2E
B05 0F A05 2F
B04 NC A04 P
B03 NC A03 P
B02 IN_COM A02 OUT_COM
B01 IN_COM A01 OUT_COM

Internal
circuit
R
B20
COM
Photo coupler
B05
B02
R

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-21

3.7 Combined Digital I/O module Output Specification
3.7.1 8 point relay output

Model
Specification
Relay output module
XBE-DR16A
Output point 8 point
Insulation method Relay insulation
Rated load
voltage / Current
DC24V 2A (Resistive load) / AC220V 2A (COS= 1), 5A/COM
Min. load voltage/Current DC5V / 1㎃
Max. load voltage AC250V, DC125V
Off leakage current 0.1㎃ (AC220V, 60㎐)
Max. On/Off frequency 3,600 times/hr
Surge absorber None
Service life Mechanical 20 millions times or more
Electrical Rated load voltage / current 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1.5A, AC240V / 1A (COS= 0.7) 100,000 times or more
AC200V / 1A, AC240V / 0.5A (COS= 0.35) 100,000 times or more
DC24V / 1A, DC100V / 0.1A (L / R = 7㎳) 100,000 times or more
Response
time
Off On 10㎳ or less
On Off 12㎳ or less
Common method 8 point / COM
Proper cable size Stranded cable 0.3~0.75㎟ (external diameter 2.8㎜ or less)
Current consumption 280㎃ (When all inputs and outputs are on)
Operation indicator LED on when output on
External connection method 9 pin terminal block connector
Weight 81g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
TB1 0 TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
TB9
Terminal bloc
k no.
TB2 1
TB3 2
TB4 3
TB5 4
TB6 5
TB7 6
TB8 7
TB9 COM

DC5V
RY
Internal
circuit
(3
(34)
TB1
TB9
TB8
(3
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-22

3.7.2 16 point transistor output(Sink type)

Model
Specification
Transistor output module
XBE-DN32A
Output point 16 point
Insulation method Photo coupler insulation
Rated voltage DC12/24V
Operation voltage range DC10.2~26.4V
Max. load current 0.2A / 1 point, 2A / 1COM
Off leakage current 0.1or less
Max. load voltage 0.7A / 10ms or less
Max. voltage drop (On) DC 0.4V or less
Surge absorber TVS Diode
Response
time
Off On 1㎳ or less
On Off 1㎳ or less (Rated load, resistive load)
Common method 32 point / COM
Proper cable size 0.3㎟
Current consumption 60㎃ (when all point On)
External
power
Voltage DC12/24V 10% (ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
Current 20㎃ or less (connecting DC24V)
Operation indicator LED On when output On
External connection method 40 pin terminal block connector
Weight 60g
Circuit configuration No. Contact Type
B20 00 A20 20 B20
B19
B18
B17
B16
B15
B14
B13
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02
B01
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A09
A08
A07
A06
A05
A04
A03
A02
A01
B19 01 A19 21
B18 02 A18 22
B17 03 A17 23
B16 04 A16 24
B15 05 A15 25
B14 06 A14 26
B13 07 A13 27
B12 08 A12 28
B11 09 A11 29
B10 0A A10 2A
B09 0B A09 2B
B08 0C A08 2C
B07 0D A07 2D
B06 0E A06 2E
B05 0F A05 2F
B04 NC A04 P
B03 NC A03 P
B02 IN_CO
M
A02 OUT_
COM
B01 A01

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-23

3.8 I/O modules’ Functions
3.8.1 Input filter function
The XGB PLC’s input modules have the input filter function to prevent the external noise signal flowed into the
input signal. For more details on the input filter function, refer to the below.
(1) Purposes and Operations of the input filter function
Under the environment with serious noise or in the case of the equipment that is greatly affected by the input
signal’s pulse width, the system may receive incorrect input depending on the input signal status. To prevent
such incorrect input, the input filter function does not regard the signal that is shorter than the set time by a
user as input. In the case of the XGB PLC, you c an set the input filter time in the range of 1ms~100ms.
The below timing chart represents the operations of the input filter function.
(2) How to set Input filter
1) Click [I/O Parameter] in XG5000
Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-24

2) Click [Module] in Slot
3) Set I/O Module
4) Click the below box and set Inpu filter
5) Set Input filter

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-25

3.8.2 Emergency output function
The XGB PLC’s output module supports the emergency output function to determine whether maintaining the
output status of the output module or clearing it when the PLC is stopped due to errors.
You can set the emergency output by 8 points. For more details on how to set the emergency output, refer to the
below.
(1) Click the below box
(2) Set Emergency output
When the emergency output is cleared, the output is turned off when the operation is stopped because an error
occurs in the PLC. If you select hold Maintain output status.

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-26

3.8.3 Pulse Catch Function
The XGB PLC basic unit has the input contacts (P0000 ~ P0007) for Pulse Catch with 8 points. Through these
contacts, it is possible to receive the very short pulse signal that cannot be recognized by the normal digital input.
(1) Purposes and Operations of the Pulse Catch function
The PLC’s input data is refreshed in a lump once every scan. Accordingly, the very short pulse signal that is
input during scan and is off before the scan is finished cannot be recognized as input. If you need to recognize
and process such short pulse signal, you can use the Pulse Catch function. If you apply this function, the short
pulse of the minimum of 10
(P0004~P0007:50)can be recognized.
The below timing chart represents the operations of the Pulse Catch function.

Step Processing details
Scan 1 When the minimum pulse signal of 50 is input, the CPU part will detect the fact and save
the status.
Scan 2 System pulse catch data area is On.
Scan 3 System pulse catch data area is Off.

(2) Setting pulse catch
1) Click basic module

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-27

2) Set pulse catch
(3) Setting pulse catch
1) Pulse catch flags are stored in below device

워 드 비트 변수 설명
F137 F01730 _PLS_CATCH_0 입력 접점 0 펄스 캐치 결과
F01731 _PLS_CATCH_1 입력 접점 1 펄스 캐치 결과
F01732 _PLS_CATCH_2 입력 접점 2 펄스 캐치 결과
F01733 _PLS_CATCH_3 입력 접점 3 펄스 캐치 결과
F01734 _PLS_CATCH_4 입력 접점 4 펄스 캐치 결과
F01735 _PLS_CATCH_5 입력 접점 5 펄스 캐치 결과
F01736 _PLS_CATCH_6 입력 접점 6 펄스 캐치 결과
F01737 _PLS_CATCH_7 입력 접점 7 펄스 캐치 결과

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-28

3.8.4 Smart link board
Easy wiring is available by connecting the IO connector with smart link board.
The available smart link and IO cable are as follows.

XGB Smart link Connection cable
Item Model Model Pin Model Length Contents
Main unit XBM-H2/HP XTB-40H
(TG7-1H40S)
40 C40HH-05SB-XBI C40HH-10SB-XBI 0.5~ 1m For main unit connection (40Pin)
Expansion
module
XBE-DC32A XTB-40H
(TG7-1H40S)
40 C40HH-10SB-XBE 1m For expansion module
connection (40Pin)
XBE-TN32A XTB-40H
(TG7-1H40S)
40 C40HH-10SB-XBE 1m
R32C-NS5A-4
0P
40 C40HH-10SB-XBE 1m For expansion module
connection (40Pin)
Exclusive for relay built-in
type

1) XTB-40H terminal array
Terminal array of XTB-40H is as follows.

Item Specification
Rated voltage AC125 / DC 24[V]
Rated current Max. 1[A]
Withstanding volta
ge
500V 1min
Insulation resistor 100(DC500V)
Cable specification AWG22-16
(1.5mm
2 / MAX)
Terminal/screw M3 X 8L
Torque 1.2N ∙ m
(12kgf ∙ cm)
material Terminal Modifide PP0
Cover Polycarbonate
PCB Epoxy 1.6t

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specifications

3-29

2) Wiring of XTB-40H and XGB extension module
Wiring of XGB main unit through XTB-40H and C40HH-10SB-XBI is as follows.
If the cable direction is reversed, pay attention to the cable connection direction as the I/O wiring between
XBM-H2/HP and XTB-40H will be different.
At this time, relationship of XGB IO signal and Smart link board terminal number is as follows.
The following figure describes signal allocation when C40HH-10SB-XBI is used as connection cable.
When the user makes the cable, make sure that wring is done as figure below.

Main
Chapter 3 Input/Output Specification

3-30

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-1

Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function
XGB (XBM ’H’) series have built-in function of High-speed counter in basic unit. This chapter describes specifications and usage
of High-speed counter’s function.
4.1 High-speed Counter Specifications
4.1.1 Performance specifications
(1) Performance specification

Classification Description
Count input
signal
Signal A-phase, B-phase
Input type Voltage input (Open collector)
Signal level 24V
Max. coefficient speed 200 kpps
Number of
channels
1 phase 200kpps 4 channels
2 phase 100kpps 2 channels
Coefficient range Signed 32 Bit (-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647)
Count mode
(Program setting)
Linear count (if 32-bit range exceeded, Carry/Borrow occurs)
Counter max. and min. value is indicated
Ring count (repeated count within setting range)
Input mode
(Program setting)
1-phase input
2-phase input
CW/CCW input
Signal type Voltage
Up/Down
setting
1 phase input Increasing/decreasing operation setting by B-phase input
Increasing/decreasing operation setting by program
2 phase input Automatic setting by difference in phase
CW/CCW A-phase input: increasing operation
B-phase input: decreasing operation
Multiplication
function
1 phase input 1 multiplication
2 phase input 4 multiplication
CW/CCW 1 multiplication
Control input Signal Preset instruction input
Signal level DC 24V input type
Signal type Voltage
External
output
Output points 2 point/channel (for each channel)
:output contact point of basic unit available
Type Select single-compared (>, >=, =, =<, <) or section compared output (included or
excluded) (program setting)
Output type Open-collector output (Sink)
Count Enable To be set through program (count available only in enable status)
Preset function To be set through terminal (contact) or program
Auxiliary mode Count Latch
Freguency Count
Unit time(1~60,000ms)
Count Stop

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-2

(2) Counter/Preset input specification

Classification Spcification
Input voltage 24V DC (20.4V ~ 28.8V)
Input current 4
On guranteed voltage (min.) 20.4V
Off guranteed voltage (max.) 6V

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-3

4.1.2 Designation of parts
(1) Designation of parts

Terminal
No.
Names Usage
1-phase 2-phase 1-phase 2-phase
B20 Ch0 counter input Ch0 A-phase input Counter input terminal A-phase input
B19 Ch1 counter input Ch0 B-phase input Counter input terminal B-phase input
B18 Ch2 counter input Ch2 A-phase input Counter input terminal A-phase input
B17 Ch3 counter input Ch2 B-phase input Counter input terminal B-phase input
B16 Ch0 preset 24V Ch0 preset 24V Preset input terminal Preset input terminal
B15 Ch1 preset 24V - Preset input terminal No use
B14 Ch2 preset 24V Ch2 preset 24V Preset input terminal Preset input terminal
B13 Ch3 preset 24V - Preset input terminal No use
B12
B11
B10
B09
B08
B07
B06
B05
B04
B03
B02 Input common Input common Common terminal Common terminal
B01 Input common Input common Common terminal Common terminal

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-4

(2) Interface with external devices
The internal circuit of High-speed counter is as shown below.

I/O Internal circuit Terminal
No.
Signal Operation On/Off
guaranteed
voltage
1-phase 2-phase
Input B20 Ch 0
Pulse input
Ch 0
A-phase input
On 20.4~28.8V 4.7 k
4.7 k
5.6 k
Off 6V or less
B19 Ch 1
Pulse input
Ch 0
B-phase input
On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B18 Ch 2
Pulse input
Ch 2
A-phase input
On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B17 Ch 3
Pulse input
Ch 2
B-phase input
On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B16 Ch 0
Preset input
Ch 0
Preset input
On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B15 Ch 1
Preset input
- On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B14 Ch 2
Preset input
Ch 2
Preset input
On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B13 Ch 2
Preset input
- On 20.4~28.8V
Off 6V or less
B01/B02 COM (input common)

4.7 k
4.7 k
5.6 k
5.6 k
5.6 k

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-5

4.1.3 High speed counter Functions
(1) Counter mode
A) High Speed counter module can count High Speed pulses which can not be processed by CPU module’s counter
instructions (CTU, CTD, CTUD, etc.), up to binary value of 32 bits (-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647).
B) Available input is 1-phase input, 2-phase input and CW/ CCW input.
C) Count increasing/decreasing methods are as follows;
(1) For 1-phase input: (1) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
(2) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal
(2) For 2-phase input: setting by difference in phase between A-phase and B-phase
(3) For CW/CCW input: Increasing operation if B-phase is LOW with A-phase input, and Decreasing operation if Aphase is LOW with B-phase input.
D) Auxiliary modes are as follows;
• Count Latch
• Periodic Pulse Count
• Frequency measure function
• Count prohibited function
E) Pulse input mode
(1) Increasing/decreasing count operation by program setting
a) 1-phase 1-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by the applicable program.

Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse
rising
A-phase input pulse falling
Increasing/decreasing count setting signal Off Increasing count -
Increasing/decreasing count setting signal On Decreasing count -

● Operation example
Increasing Decreasing Increasing
A-phase input
Pulse Off
Count 10 11 12 13

11 On
12
11 10
Off Off

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-6

(2) Increasing/decreasing count operation by B-phase input signal
1) 1-phase 2-input 1-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising and increasing/decreasing will be decided by B-phase.

Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse
rising
A-phase input pulse
falling
B-phase input pulse Off Increasing count -
B-phase input pulse On Decreasing count -

● Operation example
Increasing Decreasing Increasing
A-phase input
Pulse
Count 10 11 12 13

11 On
12
11 10
Off Off

B-phase input
Pulse
2) 2-phase count mode
a) 2-phase 4-multiplication operation mode
A-phase input pulse and B-phase input pulse count at rising/falling respectively. If A-phase input is antecedent
to B-phase input, increasing operation starts, and if B-phase input is antecedent to A-phase input, decreasing
operation starts.
Operation example
Increasing Decreasing
B-phase input
Pulse
A-phase input
Pulse
Count 10 11 15 19

12 16 20 13 17 21 17 13 20 16 12
23 22
14 18 22 19 15 11 18 14 10

21 3) CW(Clockwise)/CCW(Counter Clockw`ise) operation mode
A-phase input pulse counts at rising , or B-phase input pulse counts at rising.
Increasing operation executed when B-phase input pulse is Low with A-phase input pulse at rising, and
Decreasing operation executed when A-phase input pulse is Low with B-phase input pulse at rising.

Increasing/Decreasing classification A-phase input pulse High A-phase input pulse Low
B-phase input pulse High - decreasing count
B-phase input pulse Low Increasing count -

Operation example
Increasing Decreasing
B-phase input
Pulse
A-phase input
Pulse
Count 10 11 12 13 12 11 10

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-7

(2) Counter type
2 types of count (Linear counter, Ring counter) can be selected for the applicable use based on functions.
▪ Counter mode is saved at the following special K area.

Mode Area per each channel (word) Reference*1)
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Counter
mode
K300 K330 K360 K390 0 : linear 1 : ring

*1) If counter mode is set as value other than 0, 1, error code ‘20’ will occur.
2 types of count can be selected for the applicable use based on functions.
A) Linear counter
■ Linear Count range: -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647
■ If count value reaches the maximum value while increased, Carry will occur, and if count value reaches the
minimum value while decreased, Borrow will occur.
■ If Carry occurs, count stops and increasing is not available but decreasing is available.
■ If Borrow occurs, count stops and decreasing is not available but increasing is available.
Borrow
Carry

-2,147,483,648
Count Start Point
2,147,483,647

Count

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-8

B) Ring count
■ Ring Count range: user-defined minimum value ~ user-defined maximum value
■ The preset value and the comparator value should be set within the range of the ring counter maximum /
minimum value.
Ring counter value is saved at the following special K area.

type Area per each channel (Double word) Reference
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Ring counter
Min. value
K308 K338 K368 K398
Ring counter
Max. value
K310 K340 K370 K400

1)During increasing count
■ Even if count value exceeds user-defined maximum value during increasing count, Carry only occurs and
count does not stop differently to Linear Count.

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-9

2) During decreasing count
■ Even if count value exceeds user-defined minimum value during decreasing count, Borrow only occurs
and count does not stop differently to Linear Count.
Carry
Ring Count Max.

Value Starting point
Value

Input
Pulse
Count
: Not Included
: Incuded
Ring Count Min.
Carry/Borrow
Reset
3) Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during increasing count)
■ If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code number 27) is displayed and the counter operates as a linear counter.
When you enter it, it operates as a ring count. (Error code is not cleared.)
■ If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to increase up to the user-defined maximum value and down to the userdefined minimum value and keeps counting after Carry occurs.
- Not the maximum but the minimum value only is displayed with count kept on as shown below.
2,147,483,647
Ring count
maximum value
-2,147,483,648

Start point
:Not included
:Included
If the ring counter is
out of range
If the ring counter is
within the range
Carry occurred
Carry occurred
Start point

Ring count
minimum value

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-10

4) Operation when setting Ring Count based on present count value (during decreasing count)
■ If present count value exceeds user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Error (code number 27) is displayed and the current count value reaches the ring count range with
the linear counter, it operates as a ring count. (Error code is not cleared.)
■ If present count value is within user-defined range when setting Ring Count
- Present count value starts to decrease down to the user-defined minimum value and up to the user-defined
maximum value and keeps counting after Borrow occurs.

1. Based on count value within or out of user-defined range, count will be decided to be within or out of the
range when setting Ring Count.
2. Ring Count setting when count value is out of the range is regarded as user’s mistake. The count is not
available within the Ring Count range.
3. Use preset function or the like when using Ring Count so to surely position the count value within the range.
Remark

2,147,483,647
-2,147,483,648

Borrow
occurred
:Not included
:Included
Start point
Borrow
occurred
Start point

Ring count
maximum value
Ring count
minimum value
If the ring counter is
out of range
If the ring counter is
within the range

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-11

(3) Compared output
(a) High Speed counter module has a compared output function used to compare present count value with compared
value in size to output as compared.
(b) Available compared outputs are 2 for 1 channel, which can be used separately.
(c) Compared output conditions are 7 associated with >, =, < .
(d) Parameter setting
■ Compared output mode setting
■ Upper setting value is saved in special K area.

Compared output condition Memory address (word) Value*2)
Present Value < Compared Value Channel 0 :
K302
Channel 1 :
K332
Channel 2 :
K362
Channel 3 :
K392
Channel 0 :
K303
Channel 1 :
K333
Channel 2 :
K363
Channel 3 :
K393
Set to “0”
Present Value ≤ Compared Value Set to “1”
Present Value = Compared Value Set to “2”
Present Value ≥ Compared Value Set to “3”
Present Value > Compared Value Set to “4”
Compared value 1≤Count value≤Compared value 2 Set to “5”
Count value Compared value 1,
Count value Compared value 2
Set to “6”

*2) If compared output value not set to 0~6 using counter, error code ‘23’ will be occurred.
■ In order to make actual comparison enabled after compared output condition set, the compared enable signal is
to be On.

Classification Area per channel Operation
Ch. 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 3
Count enable signal K2600 K2700 K2800 K2900 0: N/A, 1: enable
Compared enable0 signal K2604 K2704 K2804 K2904 0: forbidden, 1: enable
Compared enable1 signal K2607 K2707 K2807 K2907 0: forbidden, 1: enable

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-12

▪ In order to make external output, the compared equivalent output signal (P20~P2F) must be set. If Compared output
contact is Off, Compared coincidence output signal (internal device) is only output.

Classification Area per channel Operation
Ch. 0 Ch. 1 Ch. 2 Ch. 3
Comparator output
signal0
K2612 K2712 K2812 K2912 0: Compared output not
equivalent
1: Compared output equivalent
Comparator output
signal1
K2613 K2713 K2813 K2913 0: Compared output not
equivalent
1: Compared output equivalent

• Comp output point (P20 ~ P2F) setting
(e) Detailed description for compared output(Based On Comp0 output mode)
A) Mode 0 (Present value < Compared value)
■ If counted present value is less than compared value, output is sent out, and if present value increases to be
equal to or greater than compared value, output is not sent out.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462

123460

Count
Comparator
Min. Value
Comparator
Output Enable
Comparator
Output Signal
External Output
(in case of
designated output)

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-13

B) Mode1 (Count value ≤ Compared value)
■ If present count value is less than or equal to compared value, output is sent out, and if count value
increases to be greater than compared value, output is not sent out.

123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462 Count
Comparator0

123460
Min. Value
Comparator
Output0 Enable
Comparator
Output Signal
External Output
(in case of
designated output)
C) Mode 2 (Count value = Compared value)
■ If present count value is equal to compared value, output is sent out. In order to turn the output Off, Compared
output Enable and Compared output signal is to be On.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462

123460

Count
Comparator0
Min. Value
Comparator
Output0 Enable
Comparator
Output Signal
External Output
(in case of
designated output)
OFF by program
D) Mode 3 (Count value ≥ Compared value)
■ If present count value is greater than or equal to compared value, output is sent out, and if count value
decreases to be less than compared value, output is not sent out.

Count 123456
Comparator0

Min. Value
Comparator
Output0 Enable
Comparator
Output Signal
External Output
(in case of designated
output)
123458
Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-14

E) Mode 4 (Count value > Compared value)
■ If present count value is greater than compared value, output is sent out, and if count value decreases to be less
than or equal to compared value, output is not sent out.

Count 123456
Comparator0

Min. Value
Comparator
Output0 Enable
Comparator
Output Signal
External Output
(in case of designated
output)

123458

F) Mode 5
(Compared output Min. set value ≤ Count value ≤ Compared output Max. set value)
■ If present count value is greater than or equal to compared output Min. value and less than or equal to
compared output Max. set value, output is sent out, and if count value increases/decreases to exceed
compared value’s range, output is not sent out.
123456 123457 123458 123459 123460 123461 123462
123457
Count
Comparator0 Min. Value
Comparator Output0 Enable
External Output
(in case of designated output)
Comparator Output Signal
Comparator0 Max. Value
123461
Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-15

G) Mode 6 (Count value ≤ Compared output Min. value, Count value ≥ Compared output Max. value)
■ If present count value is less than or equal to compared output Min. value and greater than or equal to
compared output Max. value, output is sent out, and if count value increases/decreases to exceed compared
value’s range, output is not sent out.

123456 Count
Comparator0 Min. Value

 

123458
123460

Comparator Output0 Enable
Comparator Output Signal
Comparator0 Max. Value External Output
(in case of designated output)
(4) Carry signal
A) Carry signal occurs
(1) When count range maximum value of 2,147,483,647 is reached during Linear Count.
(2) When user-defined maximum value of Ring Count changed to the minimum value during Ring Count.
B) Count when Carry Signal occurs
(1) Count stops if Carry occurs during Linear Count.
(2) Count does not stop even if Carry occurs during Ring Count.
C) Carry reset
(1) The Carry generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On.

Classification Device area per channel(BIT)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Carry signal K2610 K2710 K2810 K2910

 

Notes
The XGB modular high-end basic unit performs the comparison output function by checking the current count
value every 500 μs.
Therefore, a delay of up to 500 μs may occur for the detection of the comparison condition.

(5) Borrow signal
A) Borrow signal occurs
(1) When count range minimum value of -2,147,483,648 is reached during Linear Count.
(2) When user-defined minimum value of Ring Count changed to the maximum value during Ring Count.
B) Count when Borrow signal occurs
(1) Count stops if Borrow occurs during Linear Count.
(2) Count does not stop even if Borrow occurs during Ring Count.
C) Borrow reset
(1) The Borrow generated can be cancelled by Carry/Borrow reset signal On..

Classification Device area per channel(BIT)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Borrow signal K2611 K2711 K2811 K2911

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-16

(6) Revolution/Unit time
While auxiliary mode enable signal is On, it counts the number of input pulses for a specified time.
A) Setting
(1) Unit time setting
1) Input unit time and pulse number per 1 revolution
Setting value is saved at the following special K are and user can designate it directly.

Classification Device area per channels (WORD)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Unit time (1~60000)*3) K322 K352 K382 K412

*3) If revolution per unit time is enabled and unit time value is other than 1~60000ms, error code ‘34’ occurs.
2) Input pulse number per 1 revolution

Classification Device area per channels(WORD)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Pulse number /revolution
(1~60000)*4)
K323 K353 K383 K413

*4) If revolution per unit time is enabled and pulse number/revolution is other than 1~60000, error code ‘35’ occurs.
3) If Count function of revolution per unit time is used, enable signal set by On.

Classification Device area per channels(BIT)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Revolution/unit time
command
K2605 K2705 K2805 K2905

4) Revolution Per Unit

Classification Device area per channels(DWORD)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Revolution Per Unit K264 K274 K284 K294

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-17

B) Count function of Revolution per Unit time is used to count the number of pulses for a specified time while
Enable signal is On.
 

  pls

Pulse /REV 1000
pulse per 1revolution sec
pls

ms

   
   
1
Unittime
Inputpulse
C) With the displayed number of pulses updated for a specified time and the number of pulses per revolution input,
Revolution/Unit time can be counted.
D) If you enter Pulse/Rev and set the Unit time setting to 1 second (1000ms), the number of rotations per second
is displayed. To mark the number of revolutions per minute (RPM), you can set the unit time to 1 minute (60,000
ms).
E) The example that number of Pulse/Rev set to ‘10’
Revoluion per time

Count start

Current Count
600
400
0
Revolution per
Unit time Enable
0
Unit time Unit time Unit time Unit time
700
350
190
100
300
25
10
30
21
(7) Count latch
(a) When Count latch signal is On, present count value is latched.
(b) Setting
If present counter value is to latch, Count Latch function is set ‘Use’.

Classification Device area per channel(BIT)
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Count latch command K2606 K2706 K2806 K2906

▪ Count latch function is operated when Count latch signal is On. Namely, counter value is not cleared when power
supply Off ->On and mode change, it is counted from previous value.
▪ In latch counter function, internal or external preset function has to use for clearing present value.

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-18

(8) Preset function
It changes the current value into preset value.
There are two types of preset function, internal preset and external preset. External preset is fixed as input contact point.
• Preset setting value is saved at the following special K area.

Type Area per each channel (DWORD) Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Internal preset K304 K334 K364 K394 -
External preset K306 K336 K366 K396 -

• Preset command is specified through the following special K area, external preset is used by executing the
designated input contact point after allowance bit is on.

Type Area per each channel (BIT) Ref.
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Internal preset
command
K2601 K2701 K2801 K2901 -
External preset
allowance
K2602 K2702 K2802 K2902 -
External preset
command
P004 P005 P006 P007 -

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-19

(9) Freguency measure
Display and measure the frequency at every measurement period you set during Frequecny enable flag is on.
(b)Setting
1) Set Freq. Measure

Type Area per each channel (WORD) 설정범위
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Freq.
Mode
K324 K354 K384 K414 1000 Hz 1, 10, 100,

2) If using frequency measurement set Freq.Enable On

Type Area per each channel (BIT) 동작
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Freq.
Enable
K2608 K2708 K2808 K2908 0: Disable 1: Enable

3) Frequency measurement are stored in below devices.

Type Area per each channel (DWORD) 비고
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Freq.
Measurement
K268 K278 K288 K298

4) According to Frequency set, renewal period will be changed,

Set number Hz Renewal period[ms]
0 1 1000
1 10 100
2 100 10
3 1000 1

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-20

(10) Count pause
Count will not operate during Count pause flag is on.
To use Count pause set below device as “On”

Type Area per each channel (BIT) Operation
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Count
pause
K260A K270A K280A K290A 0: Disable
1: Enable

 

Count start

Current Count
300
0
Count pause
Enable
100
-200
(11) Counter clear
The current count is changed to 0 the moment the counter clear enable flag is turned on. The counter clear
function operates at the rising edge of the flag enable command.

Type Area per each channel (BIT) Operation
Ch.0 Ch.1 Ch.2 Ch.3
Counter
Clear
K2609 K2709 K2809 K2909 0: Disable 1: Enable

Counter Clear

Count Start

Current Count
400
300
0
-200

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-21

4.2 Installation and Wiring
4.2.1 Precaution for wiring
Pay attention to the counteractions against wiring noise especially for High-speed pulse input.
1) Alternating current and input/output signals from the high speed counter modules are used to generate a surge or decrease on
the alternating current
2) The wires should be chosen for ambient temperature and acceptable current.
3) Too close to the equipment or materials that occur in the case of a wire, or if the wires have prolonged contact with the oil etc.
Causes for short circuit to short circuit to damage or malfunction.
4) Before applying an external contact signal to the terminal, the polarity must be checked.
5) If wiring is wired with a high-pressure wire or a power line, it may cause induction disturbances to cause malfunction or
malfunction.
6) Earthing of pipes requires grounding of piping.
7) If you believe that there is no source source in the wiring between the high speed counter and the access device, please
connect the wiring input via the twisted pair and the shielded cable wires to the high speed counter.
8) For Phase 1 input only, connect A.
9) Route the maximum output distance of the pulse generator and allow it to be as short as possible.
10) Carry out a 3 grounding.
4.2.2 Example of wiring
(1) In case of pulse generator (encoder) is voltage output type

5V
int
Po
AC
5V OM

XGB PLC 펄스발생기기
Pulse
generation

Twist Sheld cable
0V
24

24V DC
- +
F.G
(2) In case of pulse generator is open collector type

A
A

C
12V
_C
OM

 

OUTA Twist Sheld cable
F.G 24V 0V

XGB PLC
24V DC
- +
Pulse
generation

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-22

4.3 Internal Memory
4.3.1 Special area for High-speed counter
(1) Parameter setting

Parameter Description Device area per channel Remar
k
Value Setting Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Counter mode h0000 Linear count K300 K330 K360 K390 Word
h0001 Ring count
Pulse input
mode
h0000 1 phase 1 input 1 multiplication K301 K331 K361 K391 Word
h0001 1 phase 2 input 1 multiplication
h0002 CW / CCW
h0003 2 phase 4 multiplication
Comp.
Output0 mode
h0000 (Magnitude) < K302 K332 K362 K392 Word
h0001 (Magnitude) ≤
h0002 (Magnitude) =
h0003 (Magnitude) ≥
h0004 (Magnitude) >
h0005 (Range) Include
h0006 (Range) Exclude
Comp.
Output1 mode
h0000 (Magnitude) < K303 K333 K363 K393 Word
h0001 (Magnitude) ≤
h0002 (Magnitude) =
h0003 (Magnitude) ≥
h0004 (Magnitude) >
h0005 (Range) Include
h0006 (Range) Exclude
Internal
preset value
setting
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K304 K334 K364 K394 DWord
External
preset value
setting
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K306 K336 K366 K396 DWord
Ring counter
Min. value
setting
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K308 K338 K368 K398 DWord
Ring counter
Max. value
setting
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K310 K340 K370 K400 DWord
Comp. Output
Min. value
setting
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K312 K342 K372 K402 DWord
Comp. output
Max. value
setting
-2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 K314 K344 K374 K404 DWord

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-23

 

Parameter Description Device area per channel Remark
Value Setting Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Comp. output 0
point
designation
HFFFF No use K320 K350 K380 K410 Word
h0000 P0020
h0001 P0021
h0002 P0022
h0003 P0023
h0004 P0024
h0005 P0025
h0006 P0026
h0007 P0027
h0008 P0028
h0009 P0029
h000A P002A
h000B P002B
h000C P002C
h000D P002D
h000E P002E
h000F P002F
Comp. output 1
point
designation
HFFFF No use K321 K351 K381 K411 Word
h0000 P0020
h0001 P0021
h0002 P0022
h0003 P0023
h0004 P0024
h0005 P0025
h0006 P0026
h0007 P0027
h0008 P0028
h0009 P0029
h000A P002A
h000B P002B
h000C P002C
h000D P002D
h000E P002E
h000F P002F
Unit time [ms] 1 ~ 60,000 K322 K352 K382 K412 DWord
Pulse/Rev.value 1 ~ 60,000 K323 K353 K383 K413 DWord
Frequency h0000 1Hz K324 K354 K384 K414 Word
h0001 10Hz
h0002 100Hz
h0003 1000Hz

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-24

(2) Operation command

Parameter Device area per channel
Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Counter enabling K2600 K2700 K2800 K2900
Internal preset designation of
counter0
K2601 K2701 K2801 K2901
External preset enabling of
counter1
K2602 K2702 K2802 K2902
Designation of decremental
counter
K2603 K2703 K2803 K2903
Comp. output enabling K2604 K2704 K2804 K2904
Enabling of revolution time
per unit time
K2605 K2705 K2805 K2905
Designation of latch counter K2606 K2706 K2806 K2906
Carry signal (Bit) K2610 K2710 K2810 K2910
Borrow signal K2611 K2711 K2811 K2911
Comp. output signal K2612 K2712 K2812 K2912

(3) Area of monitoring

Parameter Device area per channel Remark
Ch 0 Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3
Current counter value K262 K272 K282 K292 DWORD
Revolution time per unit time K264 K274 K284 K294 DWORD
Frequency measurement K268 K278 K288 K298

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-25

4.3.2 Error code
It describes errors of the built-in high-speed counter.
▪ Error occurred is saved in the following area.

Category Device area per channel Remark
Ch0 Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
Error code K266 K276 K286 K296 WORD

▪ Error codes and descriptions

Error code
(Decimal)
Description Remark
20 Counter type is set out of range
21 Pulse input type is set out of range
22 Requesting #1(3,5,7)channel Run during the 2-phase operation of #0(2,4,6)
* During #0(2,4,6) channel 2-phase operation, using #1(3,5,7)channel is not possible.
23 Compared output type setting is set out of range.
25 Internal preset value is set out of counter range
26 External present value is set out of counter range
27 Ring counter setting is set out of range
* Note ring counter setting should be 2 and more.
28 Compared output min. value is set out of permissible max. input range
29 Compared output max. value is set out of permissible max. input range
30 Error of Compared output min. value>Compared output max. value
31 Output point designation value of Compared output is set out of range
34 Set value of Unit time is out of the range
35 Pulse value per 1 revolution is set out of range
36 Compared output min. value is set out of permissible max. input range
(Compared output 1)
37 Compared output max. value is set out of permissible max. input range
(Compared output 1)
38 Error of Compared output min. value>Compared output max. value
(Compared output 1)
39 Output point designation value of Compared output is set out of range
(Compared output 1)
40 Frequency measure error

Remark
▪ If two and more errors occur, the module saves the latter error code and removes
the former one.

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-26

4.4 Examples: Using High-speed Counter
It describes examples of using high-speed counter.
1) Setting high-speed counter parameter
How to set types of parameters to operate a high-speed counter is described as follows.
A) Set
Internal Parametersin the basic project window.
B) Selecting high-speed counter opens a window to set high-speed counter parameters as follows.
For details regarding each parameter setting, refer to 8.1~8.3.
(Every parameter settings are saved in the special K device area.)

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-27

C) Turn ‘ON’ the high-speed counter Enable signal (CH0:K2600) in the program.
D) To use additional functions of the high-speed counter, you needs to turn on the flag allowing
an operation command.
* Refer to 2. Operation Command, <4.3.1 Special K Area for High-speed Counter>
For instance, turn on K2605 bit if among additional functions, rotation number function is used.
2) Monitoring and setting command
Monitoring and command setting of high-speed counter are described as follows.
A) If starting a monitor and clicking a Special Module Monitor, the following window is opened.

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-28

B) Clicking Monitorshows monitor and test window of high-speed counter.

Item Description
FLAG Monitor Show flag monitoring and command window of high-speed counter
Start Monitoring Start monitoring each item (special K device area monitor).
Test Write each item setting to PLC.
(Write the setting to special K device)
Close Close monitor

C) Clicking Start Monitoringshows the high-speed counter monitor display, in which you
may set each parameter. At this moment, if any, changed values are not saved if power off=>
on or mode is changed.

Main
Chapter 4 Built-in High-speed Counter Function

4-29

D) ClickingFLAG Monitorshows the monitor of each flag in high-speed counter, in which
you may direct operation commands by flags (clicking commands reverse turn).

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-1
Chapter 5. Built-in PID Function
5.1 Features of Built-in PID Function
Here describes built-in PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) function. When there is plant (target of control), Control means that
the user changes the status such as velocity, temperature, position, voltage, current etc. as the user wishes. Here describes
PID control that is most frequently used among diverse control methods.
Basic concept of PID control is as follows. First, it detects the PV (Process Value) through sensor and calculates what the
difference with SV (Set value) is. Then it outputs MV (Manipulated Value) for PV to be same with SV.
At this time, 3 types of operation, such as Proportion, Integration, Derivation is executed according to the requirement of the
user. PID control has high compatibility, flexibility, affordability in comparison with Robust control and Linear optimal control. In
case of other control methods, since control device can be applied to the system after mathematical analysis of system, if
system or the requirement of the user changes, the analysis of system is done again. But in case of PID control, PID device
copes with change of system or requirement of the user with simple auto-tunings without analysis of system rapidly.
The figure 5.1 is example indicating system configuration of temperature control of heating system.
<Figure 5.1PID Temperature control system with PLC>
At this time, PLC becomes control device for this system, output temperature of heating system becomes target for control. And
temperature sensor and valve becomes devices to detect and manipulate the status of system respectively. If temperature
sensor detects the output temperature and inputs that to PLC, PLC manipulate the valve status through PID operation and
control the quantity of gas that goes into heating system. So temperature of heating system changes. This process is called
control loop and PID control is executed by repeating the control loop. The control loop is repeated with a cycle of ms ~ s.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-2

The built-in PID control functions of XBM feature as follows.
(1) Since operations are executed within CPU part, it can be controlled by PID parameters and PLC program without
PID module.
(2) A variety of controls can be selected
▪ That is, a user can easily select P operation, PI operation and PID operation.
(3) Precise control operation
▪ It can make precise PID control operations possible through floating point operations.
(4) PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) output available.
▪ It outputs control operation results to the output contact point designated by a user through PWM.
(5) Improving convenience of control settings and monitoring
▪ Through parameter setting method and K area flag, it maximizes control parameter settings during operation and
convenience of monitoring
(6) Freely selectable operation direction
▪ Forward, reverse and mixed forward/reverse operations are available
(7) Cascade operation realizing quick and precise PID control
▪ It can increase quickness of response to disturbance through cascade loop.
(8) Various additional functions
▪ PID control can be achieved by various methods a user wishes because set value ramp, the present value follow-up,
limiting change of values and types of alarm functions are provided.
5.2 Basic Theory of PID Control
Here describes basic theory of PID control and how to configure PID control.
(1) Terms
Terms used in this user manual are as follows.
▪ PV: status of plant detected by sensor (Process value)
▪ SV: Target value (Set Value) to control plant, if control is done normally, PV should follow the SV.
▪ E: error between SV and PV. It can be expressed as (SV-PV).
▪ Kp: proportional coefficient
▪ Ti: Integral time constant. Sometimes called integral time
▪ Td: Derivative time constant. Sometimes called derivative time
▪ MV: Control input or control device output. The input to plant to make PV follow the V
▪ Ts: Sampling time, a cycle of operation to execute PID control
(2) PID operation expression
Basic PID operation expressions are as follows.

(5.2.1)
(5.2.2)
E SV PV
MV K E
P P
MV KT Edt

(5.2.3)

(5.2.4)
(5.2.5)
dt
d P d
MV MVP MVi MVd

P i
i
dE
MV K T

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-3
PID control operation expressions of XGB series are more complicate than expression (5.2.1) ~ (5.2.5) mathematically but
those are based on the above expression. The followings describe the characteristics of control process with an example that
controls the output temperature of heating system in figure 5.1. At this example, the system and PID parameters imaginary to
help the comprehension and those may be different with real heating system. If the heating system in figure 5.1 is expressed as
second order system with transfer function like expression (5.2.6) in frequency domain, it is expressed as differential equation
like expression (5.2.6) in the time domain.
That is, x(t) is Manipulated value and y(t) is Process value.
At this system, we assume that the PID parameter is specified as shown below to describe the PID control operation.

Items Value Items Value
Output temperature of
heating system (PV)
0 Proportional coefficient (KP) 5
Target temperature (SV) 50 Integral time (Ti) 3s
Cycle of operation 0.01s Derivative time (Td) 0.19s

<Table 5.1 example of control of heating system>
At this system, if we assume that target value of output temperature is 50
and initial value of output temperature is 0, SV
and PV becomes 50 and 0 respectively. In case of this, PID controller acts as follows.
(3) Proportional control (P control)
In the proportional control, thecontroller yields output that is proportional to error.
Manipulated value of controller by Proportional control is as follows.
(5.2.8)
(a) If P control starts, output of controller by initial P operation is as follows.
MV 50 5 250
0   
Transfer function = (5.2.6)

(5.2.7) ( ) 5 ( ) ( )
( ) 13
2
y t x t
dy t
d y t
  
32
dt
2
dt

(2 1)(3 5))
32
s s
32
6
MVP E K P
Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-4

If P control is executed for 10 seconds, output temperature will be as table 5.2.
If this is expressed with graph, it will be as Figure 5.2.

Time Target temp. Proportional
coefficient
Output temp. Error
0 50 5 0 50
1 50 5 44.98 5.02
2 50 5 53.08 -3.08
3 50 5 50.15 -0.15
4 50 5 48.42 1.58
5 50 5 48.28 1.72
6 50 5 48.44 1.56
7 50 5 48.49 1.51
8 50 5 48.49 1.51
9 50 5 48.49 1.51

< Table 5.2 example of Proportional control >
< Figure5.2 simulation of proportional control >
(b) Concerning the result of simulation, it has the maximum overshoot of about 23.4
at 0.62s and after 7s, it converges at 48.49
with offset of 1.51(about 3%).
Offset
Max. overshoot

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-5
(c) Offset is an unavoidable error when only P control is executed. Offset decreases proportional to P coefficient but overshoot
increases proportional to P coefficient. Table 5.3 and Figure 5.3 is simulation of offset and overshoot according to P coefficient.

Time Target
temperature
Kp = 5 Kp = 2.5 Kp = 1
0 50 0 0 0
1 50 45.02 63.46 46.67
2 50 53.11 42.52 46.77
3 50 50.15 47.93 41.38
4 50 50.22 47.25 41.60
5 50 48.27 46.96 43.30
6 50 48.35 46.92 43.25
7 50 48.44 46.90 43.21
8 50 48.53 46.90 43.18
9 50 48.53 46.90 43.18

<Table 5.3 Temperature- time table according to P coefficient>
< Figure 5.3 Temperature- time graph according to P coefficient >
(c) Considering table 5.3, as P coefficient decreases, offset increases but overshoot decreases.
(d) Generally, offset can’t be solved with only P control. In order to remove the offset, P control and I control is used together.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-6

(4) Proportional Integral Control (PI Control)
In I control, it yields the output proportional to error accumulated according to time. And the expression is as follows.
(a) In the expression 5.2.9, Ti means the time takes for MVi, output by I control, to be added into real output.
(b) Generally, I control is used with P control. So the expression of PI control is as follows.
(c) In the above heating system,the simulation results are asshown in the table 5.4 when proportional coefficient is 2.5 and
integral time is 1.5s.

Time Target temp. Proportional
coefficient
Integral time P Control PI Control
0 50 2.5 1.5 0 0
1 50 2.5 1.5 63.46 74.41
2 50 2.5 1.5 42.52 40.63
3 50 2.5 1.5 47.93 52.99
4 50 2.5 1.5 47.05 49.67
5 50 2.5 1.5 46.96 49.70
6 50 2.5 1.5 47.12 50.38
7 50 2.5 1.5 47.03 49.76
8 50 2.5 1.5 47.07 50.14
9 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 49.94
10 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.02
11 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 49.99
12 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
13 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
14 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00
15 50 2.5 1.5 47.06 50.00

< Table 5.4 Temperature- time table according to P coefficient >
(d) Considering table 5.4 and Figure 5.4, if P and I control is used together, offset is removed and temp. converges at 50
, target
temp. after 12s
(5.2.9)
(5.2.10)
MV KT Edt
P i
i
MV MV MV E K KT Edt
P i
P i P

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-7
(e) But in this case, convergence time is longer than that of P control and overshoot is larger. Generally, as integral time increases,
overshoot decrease. About this, refer to the Figure 5.5.
< Figure5.4 Temp.- time graph >
< Figure 5.5 overshoot according to integral time >
(f) Like this, if I control is used, overshoot is larger. According to system, large overshoot can be problem. In order to solve this, PID
control is used.
(5) Proportional integral derivative control (PID control)
In D control, when status of system changes rapidly, D controlyields the output to reduce the error. Namely, D control yields the
output proportional to change velocity of current status. So if D control is used, response speed of controller about status change
of system increases, and overshoot decreases. Output of controller by D control is as shown in expression 5.2.11.
(5.2.11)
dt
dE
MV
d K PTd
Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-8

(a) In the expression 5.2.11, Tdmeans the time takes for MVd output by I control, to be added into real output.
(b) Generally, D control is not used solely but with PD control. So PID control is expressed as expression 5.2.12.
(c) The Figure 5.6 is simulation result when PID control is applied to above heating system.

Time Target
temp.
Proportional
coefficient
Integral
time
Derivative
time
PI
Control
PID
Control
0 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 0 0
1 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 74.41 55.50
2 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 40.63 56.33
3 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 52.99 52.50
4 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.67 50.92
5 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.70 50.34
6 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.38 50.12
7 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.76 50.05
8 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.14 50.02
9 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.94 50.01
10 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.02 50.00
11 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 49.99 50.00
12 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.00 50.00
13 50 2.5 1.5 0.3 50.00 50.00

< Table 5.5 comparison of PI control and PID control >
< Figure 5.6 comparison of PI control and PID control >
(d) Considering table 5.5, in case PID control is used, max. overshoot decreases from 16.5
to 8.5. At this time, P coefficient,
integral time, derivative time are not optimal values, just one of the examples. Actually, P coefficient, integral time, derivative
time values vary according to PID control system.
(5.2.12)
dt
dE
Edt K T
KT
MV MV MV MV E K
p d
P i
P i d   P
Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-9
5.3 Functional Specifications of PID Control
The performance specifications of the built-in PID control function in XGB series are summarized in the below table.

Item Specifications
No. of loops 16 Loop
Scope of
setting PID
constants
Proportional constant(P) Real number (0 ~ 3.40282347e+38)
Integral constant(I) Real number (0 ~ 3.40282347e+38), unit: second
Differential constant(D) Real number (0 ~ 3.40282347e+38), unit: second
Scope of set value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of present value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of maneuver value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of manual maneuver value INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Indication RUN/STOP Operation: PID RUN Flag On (by loops)
Stop: PID RUN Flag Off (by loops)
Error Normal: PID Error Flag Off (by loops)
Error: PID Error Flag On,
Error code occurrence (by loops)
Warning Normal: PID Warning Flag Off (by loops)
Error: PID Warning Flag On,
Warnig code occurrence (by loops)
Control operation Control of P,PI,PD and PID, control of forward/reverse operation
Control interval 10.0ms ~ 6,553.6ms (0.1msUnit)
Additional
functions
PWM output Supportable
Mixed forward/reverse
output
Supportable
Limiting change of
present value
INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Limiting change of
maneuver value
INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Equally dividing set
value
0 ~ 65,536 (frequency of control cycle time)
Present value follow-up 0 ~ 65,536 (frequency of control cycle time)
Cascade control Supportable.
Min./max. present value -32,768 ~ 32,767
Differential filter 0.01 ~ 655.35 (x 100 Scaled Up)
Dead band setting 0 ~ 65,535
Prevention of dual
integral accumulation
Supportable
PID operation pause Supportable

< Table 5.6 built-in PID control performance specification >
Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-10

5.4 Usage of PID Control Functions
5.4.1 PID Control Parameter Setting
To use the built-in PID control function of XGB series, it is necessary to set PID control parameters by loops in the parameter
window and operate it though the commands. Here, it explains parameters to use PID control functions and how to set them.
(1) PID parameter settings
Follow the steps below to set the PID control function parameters of XGB series.
(a) If selecting the built-in parameters in Parameter of the project window, it shows the built-in parameter setting window as in
below figure.
< Figure 5.7 Parameters setting window >
(b) If selecting PID Control, it shows the PID control parameter setting window as in below figure.
[ Figure 5.8 Built-in PID function parameters setting window ]

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-11
(c) Input items
The items to set in the built-in PID function parameter window and the available scope of them are summarized in below table.

Items Description Scope
RUN mode Set the operation mode of PID control. Auto/manual operation
RUN direction Set the operation direction of PID control. Forward/reverse
Prevention of dual integral
accumulation
Set whether to allow dual integral accumulation. Disabled/enabled
PWM output Set whether to allow PWM output of maneuver value. Disabled/enabled
Operation cycle time Set the operation cycle time of PID control cycle. 100 ~ 65535
Set value Set target control value. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Proportional gain Set proportional gain. Real number
Integral time Set integral time. Real number
Differential time Set differential time. Real number
Limiting change of present value Set the limited change of present value per operation cycle. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Limiting change of maneuver value Set the limited change of maneuver value per operation cycle. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Max. maneuver value Set the max. maneuver value for control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Min. maneuver value Set the min. maneuver value for control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Manual maneuver value Set the manual maneuver value for control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
DeadBand setting Set the deadband width of the set value. 0 ~ 65,535
Differential filter value Set the filter coefficient of differential operation. 0 ~ 65,535
PWM junction Set the junction to which PWM output is out. P20 ~ P3F
PWM output cycle Set the output cycle of PWM output. 100 ~ 65,535
Set value ramp Set the frequency of set value ramp. 0 ~ 65,535
Present value follow-up Set the follow-up frequency of the present value follow-up function. 0 ~ 65,535
Min. present value Set the min. value of the input present value. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Max. present value Set the max. value of input present value. -32,768 ~ 32,767

< Table 5.7 PID function parameter setting items >
(2) Description of Setting of PID Parameters
(a) Operation mode
It is the mode to set the operation for PID control of a loop in question.
The available scope is automatic operation or manual operation.
If automatic operation is selected, it outputs the PID controlresult internally operated by the input PID control parameter as the
maneuver value while if manual operation is selected, it outputs the value input to the manual maneuver value parameter
without PID operation modified. The default is automatic operation.
(b) Operation direction
It is designed to set the operation direction for PID control of a loop in question. The available scope is forward or reverse
direction. At the moment, forward direction means increase of PV when MV increases; reverse direction means decrease PV
when MV increases. For instance, a heater is a kind of forward direction system because PV(temperature) increases when
output(heating) increases. A refrigerator is a kind of reverse direction system in which PV(temperature) decreases when
output increases.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-12

(c) Prevention of dual integral accumulation
It makes dual integral accumulation function enabled/disabled. To understand integral accumulation prevention function, it is
necessary to explain the phenomenon of integral accumulation first of all. Every drive has a limit. That is, a motor is limited to
the speed and a valve can become status overcoming the complete open/close. If it happens that MV output from a control is
beyond the output limit of a drive, its output is maintained as saturated, which may deteriorate the control performance of a
system and shorten the life of a drive. Formula (5.2.3) shows that the integral control among PID control output components
accumulates errors as time goes on, from which it may take more time to return the normal status after the actuator is
saturated in a system of which response characteristically is slow. It is so called integral accumulation phenomenon as
illustrated in Fig. 5.9, which shows that if the initial error is very large, the error is continuously accumulated by integral control.
Accordingly, a drive is saturated within its output upper limit while the control signal is getting larger, keeping being saturated for
a long while until the drift becomes negative and the integral term turns small enough. Due to the operation, the PV may have
a large over-shoot as seen in the figure. Such a wind-up phenomenon may occur if the initial drift is large or by a large
disturbance or due to malfunction of a device.
The PID function of XGB series is basically with the integral accumulation prevention function, cutting off any integral
accumulation phenomenon. In addition, it can detect a time when SV is suddenly decreased, providing a more strong dual
integral accumulation prevention function.
< Figure 5.9 Integral accumulation phenomenon >
(d) PWM Output Enabled
PWM output means an output method to turn a junction on – off with a duty proportional to control output calculated by a
uniform output cycle. If PWM output is enabled, it realizes PWM output in accordance with PWM output cycle set in the
parameter of PWM output junction(P20 ~ P3F) designated in the parameter. At the moment, the PWM output cycle follows
the PWM output cycle separately set in PID operation cycle. PWM output cycle is available between 10ms ~ 6553.5ms
(setting value: 100 ~ 65,535)while it is set at a unit of integer per 0.1ms.
(Be aware, actual PWM output value have max. 2ms output err)
figure shows the relation between PID control output and PWM output.
Ex) if PWM output cycle: 1 second, PWM output junction: P20, max. output: 10000, min. output: 0

Time Output P40 junction operation
0 sec 5000 0.5 sec On, 0.5 sec Off
1 sec 3000 0.3 sec On, 0.7 sec Off

Time
Target
value
PV Upper limit of drive output
MV
Drive saturation
Integral accumulation phenomenon

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-13
[ Figure 5.10 Relation between PWM output cycle and MV ]
(e) Set value
It sets the target of a loop in question, that is, the target status a user wishes to control. In case of the PID control built in XGB,
physical values (temperature, flow rate, pressure and etc) of an object to control is not meaningful and instead, it should use
the physical amount of an object to control after converting them into numerals. For instance, in order to control a system using
a sensor that the output is 0V when its heating device temperature is 0
while it is 10V when the temperature is 100as
much as 50
, it is necessary to set SV as 2000 (as long as it uses AD input module XBE-AD04A).
(f) Operation cycle
It sets the cycle to yield control output by executing the built-in PID operation. The setting cycle is 0.1ms and available between
10ms ~ 6553.5ms (setting value: 100 ~ 65,535) while it is set at a unit of integer per 0.1ms. For instance, to set PID operation
per 100ms, set the operation cycle as 1000.
(g) Proportional gain
It is intended to set the proportional coefficient of a PID loop in question (Kp). As larger Kp, the proportional control operation is
getting stronger. The scope is real number.
(h) Integral time
It sets the integral time of PID loop in question (Ti). As larger the integral time, the integral operation is getting weaker. The
scope is real number at the unit of second.
(i) Differential time
It sets the differential time of PID loop in question (Td). As larger the differential time, the differential operation is getting stronger.
The scope is real number at the unit of second.
(j) Limiting change of present value
It sets the limit of change in present value of PID loop in question. If PV suddenly changes due to signalcomponents such as
sensor’s malfunction, noise or disturbance during control of PID, it may cause sudden change of PID control output. To
prevent the phenomenon, a user can set the max. limit of change in present value that is allowed per PID operation cycle. If
the change of present value is limited accordingly, it may calculate the present value as much as the limit although the present
value is changed more than the limit once the limit of change in present value is set. If using the PV change limit function, it
may prevent against sudden change of control output owing to noise or etc. If it is, however, set too small, it may reduce the
response speed to the PV change of an actual system, not to sudden change by noise or etc, so it is necessary to set the
value appropriately according to the environment of a system to control in order that the PV toward the set value does not take
a longer time. The available scope is between -32,768~32,767. If setting the PV change limit as 0, the function is not available.
P20 output

0.5sec 0.5sec 0.3sec 0.7sec
Output cycle = 1sec Output cycle = 1sec

MV = 5000 MV = 3000
Time
(%QX0.0.0
output)

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-14

(k) Limiting change of MV (ΔMV function)
It limits the max. size that control output, which is output by PID operation is changed at a time. The output MV in this operation
cycle is not changed more than the max. change limit set in theprevious operation cycle. The function has an effect to prevent
a drive from operating excessively due to sudden change of output by preventing sudden change of output resulting from
instantaneous change of set value. If it is, however, set too small, it may cause taking a longer time until PV reaches to its
target, so it is necessary to adjust it appropriately. The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767. If setting it as 0, the
function does not work.
(l) Max. MV
It sets the max. value of control output that may be output by the result of PID operation. Theavailable scope is between -
32,768 ~ 32,767. if it exceeds the max. output designated by PID operation result, it outputs the set max. output and alerts the
max. output excess warning. For the types and description of warnings, refer to Error/Warning Codes.
(m) Min. MV
It sets the min. value of control output that may be output by the result of PID operation. The available scope is between -
32,768 ~ 32,767. If it is smaller than the min. output value designated by PID operation result, it outputs the set min. MV and
alerts the min. output shortage warning. For the types and description of warnings, refer to Error/Warning Codes.
(n) Manual MV
It sets the output when the operation mode is manual. The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767.
(o) DeadBand setting
It sets the deadband between set value and present value. Although it may be important to reduce normal status reply of PV
for its set value even when MV fluctuates heavily, depending on control system, it may be more important to reduce the
frequent change of MV although the normal status reply is somewhat getting larger. DeadBand may be useful in the case.
Below figure shows an example of DeadBand setting.
[ Figure 5.11 Example of DeadBand setting ]
If setting deadband as in the figure, the PID control built in XGB may regard the error between PV and set value as 0 as long
as PV is within the available scope of deadbandfrom set value.
That is, in this case, the change of MV is reduced. The available scope of setting is between 0 ~ 65,535 and if it is set as 0, it
does not work.
DeadBand
PV

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-15
(o) Differential Filter Value Setting
It sets the coefficient of differential filter. Since differential control outputs in proportion to gradient of error and gradient of PV
change, it may suddenly change MV as it generates a large response to instantaneous noise or disturbance. To prevent it,
XGB series uses a value to which PV is filtered mathematically for differential control. Differential filter value is the coefficient to
determine the filter degree fordifferential control. As smaller differential value set, as stronger differential operation is. The
available scope is between 0 ~ 65,535 and if it is set as 0, the differential filter does not work.
(p) Setting set value ramp
Since the drift is suddenly large if SV is heavily changed during PID control, MV is also changed heavily to correct it. Suchan
operation may cause excessive operation of a system to controland a drive. To prevent it, SV ramp is used, changing SV
gradually step by step when modifying SV during operation. If using the function, SV is gradually changed by SV ramp when
SV is changed during PID control. At the moment, SV ramp setting represents the frequency of PID operation cycle taken
from when SV starts changing to when it reaches to the final SV. For instance, if SV is tobe changed from 1000 to 2000
during operation as PID operation cycle is 10ms and its SV ramp is 500, SV may reach to 2000 after 500X10ms = 5 seconds,
that is, as it increases each 2per operation cycle and after the 500th operation scans. The available scope of setting is
between 0 ~65,535 and it is set as 0, it does not work.
[ Figure 5.12 SV Ramp function ]
(q) PV Follow-up setting
It is intended to prevent any excessive operation of a drive resulting from sudden change of output at the initial control and
changes SV gradually from PV at the time when PID operation starts, not directly to SV in case control just turns from stop to
operation mode or it changes from manual to automatic operation. At the moment, SV represents the frequency of PID
operation cycles taken from when control starts to when it reaches to the set SV (other operations are same as SV ramp
function). The available scope is between 0 ~ 65,535. If SV is changed again while PV follow-up is in operation, the SV would
be also changed according to SV ramp.
(r) Min./max. PV
It sets the min./max. value entered as the present value of PID control. The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767.
Ti
Existing
SV
Modified
SV
If SV Ramp is not used
If SV Ramp is used

SV * operatio
l

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-16

5.4.2 PID Flags
The parameter set by the XGB series built-in PID control function is saved into the flash memory of the basic unit. Such
parameters are moved to K area for the built-in PID function as soon as PLC turns from STOP to RUN mode. PID control
operation by PID control command is executed through K area data for PID functions. Therefore, if a user changes the value in
the trend monitor window or variable monitor window during operation, PID operation is executed by the changed value. At the
moment, if PLC is changed to RUN again after being changed to STOP, it loads the parameters in flash memory to K area, so
the data changed in K area is lost. Thus, to keep applying the parameters adjusted in K area, it is necessary to write the
parameter set in K area to flash memory by using WRT command. (In case of IEC, APM_WRT)
(1) PID Flag Configuration
K area flags for XGB series built-in PID control function are summarized in the below table.

Loop K area IEC type Symbol Data
type
Default Description
Common K12000~F %KX19200~15 _PID_MAN Bit Auto PID output designation
(0:auto, 1:manual)
K12010~F %KX19216~31 _PID_PAUSE Bit RUN PID pause (0:RUN, 1:pause)
K12020~F %KX19232~47 _PID_REV Bit Forward Control direction(0:forward,
1:reverse) operation control
K12030~F %KX19248~63 _PID_AW2D Bit Disabled Dual integral accumulation
Prevention
(0:enabled, 1:disabled)
K12060~F %KX19296~311 _PID_D_on_ERR Bit ERR PID Derivative term (0:on PV,
1:on ERR)
K12040~F %KX19264~79 _PID_REM_RUN Bit Disabled PID remote operation
(0:disabled, 1:enabled)
K1205~K1207 %KW1205~%KW1207 Reserved WORD - Reserved area
K12080~F %KX19328~43 _PID_PWM_EN Bit Disabled PWM output enable
(0:disabled, 1:enabled)
K12090~F %KX19344~59 _PID_STD Bit - PID operation indication
(0:stop, 1:run)
K12100~F %KX19360~75 _PID_ALARM Bit - PID warning
(0:normal, 1:warning)
K12110~F %KX19376~91 _PID_ERROR Bit - PID error(0:normal, 1:error)
K12120~F %KX19392~407 _PID_MV_BMPL Bit Disabled PID MV BuMPLess changeover
(0:disabled, 1:enabled)
K1213~K1215 %KW1213~%KW1215 Reserved WORD - Reserved
Loop 0 K1216 %KW1216 _PID00_SV INT 0 PID SV
K1217 %KW1217 _PID00_T_s WORD 100 PID operation cycle[0.1ms]
K1218 %KD609 _PID00_K_p REAL 1 PID proportional constant
K1220 %KD610 _PID00_T_i REAL 0 PID integral time[sec]
K1222 %KD611 _PID00_T_d REAL 0 PID differential time[sec]
K1224 %KW1224 _PID00_d_PV_max WORD 0 PID PV change limit
K1225 %KW1225 _PID00_d_MV_max WORD 0 PID MV change limit
K1226 %KW1226 _PID00_MV_max INT 4000 PID MV max. value limit
K1227 %KW1227 _PID00_MV_min INT 0 PID MV min. value limit
K1228 %KW1228 _PID00_MV_man INT 0 PID manual output

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-17

K1229 %KW1229 _PID00_PV INT - PID PV

<Table 5.8 K area flags for PID control >

Loop K area IEC type Symbol Data
type
Default Description
Loop 0 K1230 %KW1230 _PID00_PV_old INT - PID PV of previous cycle
K1231 %KW1231 _PID00_MV INT 0 PID MV
K1232 %KD616 _PID00_ERR DINT - PID control error
K1234 %KD617 _PID00_MV_p REAL 0 PID MV proportional value
component
K1236 %KD618 _PID00_Mv_i REAL 0 PID MV integral control
component
K1238 %KD619 _PID00_MV_d REAL 0 PID MV differential control
component
K1240 %KW1240 _PID00_DB_W WORD 0 PID deadband setting
K1241 %KW1241 _PID00_Td_lag WORD 0 PID differential filter coefficient
K1242 %KW1242 _PID00_PWM WORD H’20 PID PWM junction setting
K1243 %KW1243 _PID00_PWM_Prd WORD 100 PID PWM output cycle
K1244 %KW1244 _PID00_SV_RAMP WORD 0 PID SV Ramp value
K1245 %KW1245 _PID00_PV_Track WORD 0 PID PV follow-up setting
K1246 %KW1246 _PID00_PV_MIN INT 0 PID PV min. value limit
K1247 %KW1247 _PID00_PV_MAX INT 4000 PID PV max. value limit
K1248 %KW1248 _PID00_ALM_CODE Word 0 PID warning code
K1249 %KW1249 _PID00_ERR_CODE Word 0 PID error code
K1250 %KW1250 _PID00_CUR_SV INT 0 PID SV of current cycle
K1251-1255 %KW1251-1255 Reserved WORD - Reserved area
Loop 1 K1256~K1295 %KW1256~%KW1295 - - - PID Loop1 control parameter
~
Loop16 K1816~K1855 %KW1816~%KW1855 - - - PID Loop16 control parameter

< Table 5.8 K area flags for PID control (continued) >
K1200 ~ K1211 areas are the common bit areas of PID loops while each bit represents the status of each PID control loop.
Therefore, each 16 bits, the max number of loops of XGB PID control represents loop status and setting respectively. K1216 ~
K1255 areas are K areas for PID control loop 0 and save the loop 0 setting and status. It also contains parameters such as SV,
operation cycle, proportional coefficient, integral time and differential time set in the built-in parameter window and the XGB builtin PID function executes PID control by each device value in question. In addition, the output data such as MV calculated and
output while PID control is executed is also saved into the K areas. By changing the values in K areas, control setting may be
changed any time during PID control.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-18

By changing value of area, you can change control setting whenever you want during the PID control
1) PID control flag expression : _PID[n]_xxx
[n] : loop number
xxx : flag function
Ex) _PID10_K_p : means K_p of loop 10.
(2) PID flag function
Each function of K area flags for XGB series built-in PID control function is summarized as follows.
(a) Common bit area
The area is a flag collecting operation setting and information consisting of bits to each 16 loop. Each bit of each word device
represents the information of each loop. That is, ‘n’ th bit represents the information about PID loop n.
1) _PID_MAN (PID RUN mode setting)
It determines whether to operate the PID control of n loop automatically or manually. For more information about RUN
mode, refer to 5.4.1 PID control parameter setting. If the bit is off, it operates automatically; if on, it runs manually.
2) _PID_PAUSE (PID Pause setting)
It changes PID control of n loop to pause status. If PID control is paused, the control MV is fixed as the output at the time
of pause. At the moment, PID operation is continued internally with output fixed. If changing pause status to operation
status again, it resumes control, so it may take a longer time until the PV is going to SV once system status is largely
changed during pause. If the bit is off, it cancels pause; if on, it operates as paused.
3) _PID_REV (PID RUN direction setting)
It sets the RUN direction of PID control of ‘n’th loop. For more information about run direction, refer to 7.2.3 PID control
parameter setting. If the bit is off, it operates normally; if on, it operates reversely.

Flag name address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_MAN
(PID RUN mode setting)
K1200n %KX19200 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_PAUSE (PID pause setting) K1201n %KX19216 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_REV
(PID RUN direction setting)
K1202n %KX19232 + n BIT Available

Remark
Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-19
4) _PID_AW2D (Dual Integral accumulation prevention setting)
It sets enable/disable of dual integral accumulation prevention of ‘n’th loop. For more information about dual
integral accumulation prevention, refer to 7.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the bit is off, it is enabled; if
on, it is disabled.
5) _PID_D_on_ERR (PID Derivative term)
Set the D operation source of the nth loop to PV / ERR.
6) _PID_REM_RUN (PID remote operation setting)
XGB series built-in PID function can be started by both run from command’s start junction and remote run bit setting. That
is, XGB starts PID control if PIDRUN command’s start junction is on or remote run setting bit is on. Namely, if one of them
is on, it executed PID control.
7) _PID_PWM_EN (PWM output enable)
It determines whether to output the MV of PID control of ‘n’th loop as PWM output. For more information about PWM
output, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the bit is off, it is disabled; if on, it is enabled.
8) _PID_STD (PID RUN status indication)
It indicates the PID control RUN status of ‘n’ th loop. If a loop is running or paused, it is on while if it stops or has an error
during RUN, it is off. In the area as monitoring area, it is changed to the current run status by PLC although a user enters
any value temporarily.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_AW2D
(dual integral accumulation prevention
setting)
K1203n %KX19248 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_D_on_ERR
(PID Derivative term)
K1206n %KX19296 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_REM_RUN
(PID remote run setting)
K1204n %KX19264 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_PWM_EN
(PWM output enable)
K1208n %KX19328 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_STD
(PID RUN status indication)
K1209n %KX19344 + n BIT Unavailable

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-20

9) _PID_ALARM (PID Warning occurrence)
It indicates warning if any warning occurs during PID control of ‘n’th loop. Once a warning occurs during PID control
operation of a loop, it is on while if it is normal, it is off.At the moment, despite of warning, PID control continues without
interruption, but it is desirable to check warning information and take a proper measure. Once a warning occurs, the
warning code is also indicated in warning code area of a loop. For more information about the types of warning codes
and measures, refer to 5.5. In the area as monitoring area, it is changed to the current run status by PLC although a user
enters any value temporarily.
10) _PID_ERROR (PID Error occurrence)
IIf an error that discontinues running during PID control of ‘n’ th loop occurs, it indicates the error’s occurrence. If an error
generates warning, it is on; if normal, it is off. When an error occurs, PID control stops and MV is output as the min. output
set in parameter. Also, if an error occurs, the error code is indicated in the error code area of a loop. For more information
about type of error codes and measures, refer to 5.5. In the area as monitoring area, it is changed to the current run
status by PLC although a user enters any value temporarily.
11) _PID_MV_BMPL (PID MV BuMPLess changeover)
This allows to not only determine an appropriate MV value through operation so that MV can continue smoothly when the
corresponding PID loop changes from manual to auto output mode, but also reflect the MV value to the internal state so
as to stabilize MV. This function shows an algorithm difference between single operation and cascade operation, but both
operations are performed by this bit.
If the corresponding bit (in cascade operation, the corresponding bit of the master/slave loop is On) is On, Bumpless
changeover is performed. If it is Off, The [Default] Bumpless changeover function is Disabled
(b) PID Flag area by loops
PID flag areas by loops are allocated between K1216 ~ K1855 and for totally 16 loops, each 40 words is allocated per loop.
Therefore, the individual data areas of ‘n’ th loop are between K (1216+16*n) ~ K (1255+16*n). Every setting of the PID flag
areas by loops may be changed during PID control operation. Once the settings are changed, they are applied from the next
PID control cycle.
1) _PIDxx_SV (PID xx Loop SV setting)

It
_PIDxx_SV
(PID xx Loop SV setting)
K1216+16*xx %KW1216+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_ALARM
(PID Warning occurrence)
K1210n %KX19360 + n BIT Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_ERROR
(PID error occurrence)
K1211n %KX19376 + n BIT Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_MV_BMPL
(PID MV BuMPLess changeover)
K1212n %KX19392 + n BIT Available

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-21
It sets/indicates the SV of PID control of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about SV, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter
setting. The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767.
2) _PIDxx_T_s (PID xx Loop operation cycle)
It sets/indicates the operation cycle of PID control of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about operation cycle, refer to 5.2.3
PID control parameter setting. The available scope is between 100 ~ 65,535.
3) _PIDxx_K_p (PID xx Loop proportional constant)
It sets/indicates the proportional constant of PID control of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about proportional constant,
refer to 7.2.3 PID Control Parameter Setting. The available scope is real number (-3.40282347e+38 ~ -1.17549435e-38 ,
0 , 1.17549435e-38 ~ 3.40282347e+38). If it is, however, set as 0 and lower, the PID control of a loop generates an error
and does not work.
4) _PIDxx_T_i (PID xx Loop Integral time)
It sets/indicates integral time of PID control of ‘xx’ th loop. The available scope is real number. If it is set as 0 and lower, it
does not execute integral control.
5) _PIDxx_T_d (PID xx Loop differential time)
It sets/indicates differential time of PID control of ‘xx’ th loop. The available scope is real number. If it is set as 0 and lower,
it does not execute differential control.
6) _PIDxx_d_PV_max (PV change limit)

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_T_s
(PID xx Loop operation cycle)
K1217+16*xx %KW1217+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_K_p
(PID xx Loop proportional constant)
K1218+16*xx %KD609+20*xx REAL Real number

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_T_i
(PID xx Loop integral time)
K1220+16*xx %KD610+20*xx REAL Real number

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_T_d
(PID xx Loop differential time)
K1222+16*xx %KD611+20*xx REAL Real number

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_d_PV_max
(PV change limit)
K1224+16*xx %KD612+20*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-22

It sets the PV change limit of ‘xx’ th loop.
For more information about PV change limit, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If it is set as 0, the
PV change limit function does not work.
7) _PIDxx_d_MV_max (MV change limit)
It sets the MV change limit of ‘xx’th loop. For more information about MV change limit, refer to 5.2.3 PID
control parameter setting. If it is set as 0, the MV change limit function does not work.
8) _PIDxx_MV_max, _PIDxx_MV_min, _PIDxx_MV_man (max. MV, min. MV, manual MV)
It sets the max. MV, min. MV and manual MV of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about max. MV, min. MV and manual
MV, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter setting. If the max. MV is set lower than the min. MV, the PID control loop
generates an error and does not work.
9) _PIDxx_PV (prevent value)
It is the area that receives the present value of ‘xx’ th PID control loop. PV is the present status of the system to control
and is normally saved into U device via input devices such as A/D input module if it is entered from a sensor. The value is
used to execute PID operation by moving to _PIDxx_PV by means of commands like MOV.
10) _PIDxx_PV_OLD (PV of previous control cycle)
The area indicates the PV just before the xx th PID control loop. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring flag, would be
updated by PLC although a user directly enters it.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_d_MV_max
(MV change limit)
K1225+16*xx %KD610+20*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_MV_max (max. MV) K1226+16*xx %KW1226+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_MV_min (min. MV) K1227+16*xx %KW K1227+16*xx
_PIDxx_MV_man (manual MV) K1228+16*xx %KW K1228+16*xx

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_PV
(present value)
K1229+16*xx %KW1229+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_PV_OLD
(PV of previous control cycle)
K1230+16*xx %KW1230+16*xx INT Unavailable

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-23
11) _PIDxx_MV (Control MV)
The area shows the MV of ‘xx’ th PID control loop. As the area in which XGB built-in PID operation result is output every
PID control cycle, it delivers the value in the area to U device every scanning by using commands like MOV in the
program and outputs to D/A output module, operating a drive.
12) _PIDxx_ERR (Present error)
The areas shows the current error of ‘xx’ th PID control loop. It is also used as an indicator about how much gap the
present status has with a desired status and if an error is 0, it means the control system reaches a desired status exactly.
Therefore, if control starts, error is quickly reduced at transient state and it reaches normal state, maintaining remaining
drift as 0, it could be an ideal control system. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated although a user directly
enters it.
13) _PIDxx_MV_p, _PIDxx_MV_i, _PIDxx_MV_d (P/I/D control components of MV)
It indicates ‘n’ th loop MV by classifying proportional control MV, integral control max. MV and differential control MV. The
entire MV consists of the sum of these three components. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated although a
user directly enters it.
14) _PIDxx_DB_W (DeadBand setting)
It sets the deadband of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about Deadband function, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter
setting. If it is set as 0, the function does not work.
15) _PIDxx_Td_lag (Differential filter coefficient)

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_MV (control MV) K1231+16*xx %KW1231+16*xx INT Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_ERR
(present error)
K1232+16*xx %KW1232+16*xx DINT Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_MV_p
(MV proportional control component)
K1234+16*xx %KD616+20*xx REAL Unavailable
_PIDxx_MV_i
(MV integral control component)
K1236+16*xx %KD617+20*xx
_PIDxx_MV_d
(MV differential control component)
K1238+16*xx %KD618+20*xx

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_DB_W
(DeadBand setting)
K1240+16*xx %KW1232+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-24

It sets the differential filter coefficient of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about differential filter coefficient, refer to 5.2.3
PID control parameter setting. If it is set as 0, the function does not work.
16) _PIDxx_PWM (PWM output junction setting)
It sets the junction to which PWM output of ‘xx’ th loop is output. PWM output junction is valid only between H’20 ~ H’3F. If
any other value is entered, PWM output does not work.
17) _PIDxx_PWM_Prd (PWM Output cycle setting)
It sets the PWM output cycle of ‘xx’ th loop. The available scope is between 100 ~ 65,535 at the unit of 0.1ms.
18) _PIDxx_SV_RAMP (SV ramp setting)
It sets the SV ramp value of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about SV ramp of PV, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter
setting. If it is set as 0, the function does not work.
19) _PIDxx_PV_Track (PV follow-up setting)
It sets the PV follow-up SV of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about PV follow-up, refer to 5.2.3 PID control parameter
setting. If it is set as 0, the function does not work.
20) _PIDxx_PV_MIN, _PIDxx_PV_MAX(Min. PV input, Max. PV input)

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_Td_lag
(differential filter coefficient)
K1241+16*xx %KW1241+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PID00_PWM
(PWM output junction setting)
K1242+16*xx %KW1242+16*xx WORD H’20 ~ H’3F

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_PWM_Prd
(PWM output cycle setting)
K1243+16*xx %KW1243+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_SV_RAMP
(SV ramp setting)
K1244+16*xx %KW1244+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_PV_Track
(PV follow-up setting)
K1245+16*xx %KW1245+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-25
It sets the min./max. PV of ‘xx’ th loop.
21) _PIDxx_ALM_CODE (Warning code)
It indicates warning code if a warning occurs during ‘xx’ th loop run. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated
although a user directly enters it. For more information about warning code, refer to 5.5.
22) _PIDxx_ERR_CODE (Error code)
It indicates error code if an error occurs during ‘xx’ th loop run. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated although a
user directly enters it. For more information about warning code, refer to 5.5.
23) _PIDxx_CUR_SV (SV of the present cycle)
It indicates SV currently running of ‘xx’ th loop. If SV is changing due to SV ramp or PV follow-up function, it shows the
currently changing PV. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, is updated although a user directly enters it.

_PIDxx_MV_p
(MV proportional control component)
K1246+16*xx %KW1246+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_MV_i
(MV integral control component)
K1247+16*xx %KW1247+16*xx

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_ALM_CODE
(Warning code)
K1248+16*xx %KW1248+16*xx WORD Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_ERR_CODE
(error code)
K1249+16*xx %KW1249+16*xx WORD Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_CUR_SV
(SV of the present cycle)
K1250+16*xx %KW1250+16*xx INT Unavailable

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-26

5.5 PID Instructions
It describes PID control commands used in XGB series. The command type of PID control used in XGB series built-in PID
control is 4.
(1) PIDRUN
PIDRUN is used to execute PID control by loops.
- Operand S means the loop no. to execute PID control and avaiable only for constant(0~15).
- If start signal contact is on, the PID control of a loop starts.
(2) PIDCAS
PIDCAS is a command to execute CASCADE control.
- Operand M and S mean master loop and slave loop respecively and available only for constant(0~15).
- If start signal contact is on, cascade control is executed through master loop and slave loop.
Cascade control is called a control method which is intended to increase control stability through quick removal of
disturbance by connecting two PID control loops in series and is structured as follows.
[Figure 5.13 Comparison of single loop control and cascade control]
Looking at the figure, it is found that cascade control contains slave loop control within external control loop. That is, the
control output of external loop PID control is entered as SV of the internal loop control. Therefore, if steam valve suffers
from disturbance in the figure, single loop PID control may not be modified until PV, y(s) appears while cascade control is
structured to remove any disturbance by the internal PID loop control before any disturbance that occurs in its internal
loop affects the PV, y(s), so it can early remove the influence from disturbance.
XGB internal PID control connects two PID control loops each other, making cascade control possible. At the moment,
MV of external loop is automatically entered as the SV of internal loop, so it is not necessary to enter it through program.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-27
(3) PIDHBD
PIDHBD is a command to execute the mixed forward/reverse E control.
- Operand F and R represent forward operation loop and reverse operation loop and available only for constant(0~15).
- If start signal conatact is on, it starts the mixed forward/reverse operation from the designated forward/reverse loops.
The mixed forward/reverse control is called a control method to control forward operation control output and reverse operation
control operation alternatively to a single control process. The XGB built-in PID control enables the mixed forward/reverse
control by connecting two PID control loops set as forward/reverse operations. At the moment, it uses PIDHBD command.
For more information about the command, refer to 5.2.5. The mixed forward/reverse run is executed as follows in the XGB
built-in PID control.
(a) Commencement of mixed run
If PIDHBC command starts first, it starts reverse run when PV is higher than SV; it starts forward run if PV is lower than
SV.
(b) Conversion of RUN direction
The conversion of run direction is executed according to the following principles. In case of forward operation run, it keeps
running by converting to reverse operation once PV is over SV + DeadBand value. At the moment, the DeadBand setting
value uses the deadband of a loop set for forward operation. If PV is below SV – DeadBand value during reverse
operation, it also keeps running by converting to forward operation. In the case, the DeadBand setting uses the
deadband of a loop set for reverse loop. It may be illustrated as 5.14.
[Figure 5.14 Conversion of RUN direction in the mixed forward/reverse control]
(c) At the moment, every control parameter uses the parameter of a loop set for forward operation while MV is output to MV
output area of a loop of forward operation. Reversely, every control parameter uses the parameter of a loop set for
reverse operation during reverse operation run while MV is also output to MV output area of reverse operation loop.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-28

5.6 PID Auto-tuning
5.6.1 Basic Theory of PID Auto-tuning
It describes the function of PID auto-tuning.
The performance of PID controller is very different according to P, I, D coefficient. Generally, It is very difficult and takes long time
to predict the system and set P, I, D coefficient because of non-periodical disturbance, interference of other control loop, dynamic
characteristic of control system though the engineer is good at handling the PID controller. So auto-tuning that sets the PID
coefficient automatically is very useful. Generally, there are many methods in setting the PID coefficient. Here, it will describe
Relay Auto-tuning.
(1) PID coefficient setting by Relay auto-tuning
It makes critical oscillation by force and uses the width and period of oscillation to specify the PID coefficient. It applies max.
output and min. output to control system for auto-tuning. Then, oscillation with steady period and steady width occurs
around the Set value like figure 5.15, and it can calculate the boundary gain by using it like expression (5.3.1).
< Figure 5.15 Relay auto-tuning >

width

u
Max output Min output
K
 

4 ( . . )
(5.4.1)

At this time, oscillation period is called boundary period. If boundary gain and period is specified, use table 5.9, Ziegler &
Nichols tuning table to specify the PID coefficient. This Relay tuning is relatively simple to configure and easy to know the
boundary gain and period so it is used frequently and XGB built-in PID auto-tuning uses this method.

Controller Proportional gain
(Kp)
Integral time(Ti) Differential time(Td)
P 0.5Ku - -
PI 0.45Ku Pu /1.2 -
PID 0.6Ku Pu / 2 Pu /8

< Table 5.9 Ziegler & Nichols tuning table >
Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-29
5.6.2 PID Auto-tuning Function Specifications
The specifications of the XGB series built-in PID auto-tuning function are summarized as in Table.

Item Specifications
Scope of SV INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of PV INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Scope of MV INT (-32,768 ~ 32,767)
Error indication Normal: error flag off
Error: error flag off, error code occurs
AT direction setting Forward/Reverse
Control cycle 100 ~ 65,536 (0.1msUnit)
Additional
function
PWM output Supportable
Hysteresis Supportable

[Table 5.10 Spec. of built-in PID auto-tuning function]
5.6.3 Auto-tuning Parameter Setting
To use the XGB series auto-tuning function, it is necessary to start it by using a command after setting auto-tuning
parameters by loops in the parameter window. It explains the parameters to use auto-tuning function and how to set them.
(1) Auto-tuning parameter setting
To set the parameters of XGB series auto-tuning function, follow the steps.
(a) If selecting parameter in project window and the built-in parameter, it shows the built-in parameter setting window as
seen in below figure.
< Figure 5.16 Built-in parameter setting window >

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-30

(b) If selecting auto-tuning, it shows the parameter setting window as seen in Figure 5.17.
<Figure 5.17 Built-in auto-tuning function parameter setting window>
(c) Input items
Table shows the items to set in auto-tuning parameter window and the available scopes.

Items Description Scope
RUN direction Set the run direction of auto-tuning. Forward/reverse
PWM output enable Set whether to set PWM output of MV enabled/
disabled.
Disable/enable
SV Set SV. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Operation time Set auto-tuning operation time. 100 ~ 65535
Max. MV Set the max. MV in control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
Min. mV Set the min. MV in control. -32,768 ~ 32,767
PWM junction
designation
Designate the junction to which PWM output is
output.
P20 ~ P3F
PWM output cycle Set the output cycle of PWM output. 100 ~ 65,535
Hysteresis setting Set the hysteresis of auto-tuning MV. 0 ~ 65,535

< Table 5.11 Auto-tuning function parameter setting items>
(2) Description of auto-tuning parameters and how to set them
(a) RUN direction
RUN direction is to set the direction of auto-tuning run of a loop. The available option is forward or reverse. The former
(forward) means that PV increase when MV increases while the latter (reverse) means PV decreases when MV increases.
For instance, a heater is a kind of forward direction system because PV (temperature) increases when output (heating)
increases. A refrigerator is a kind of reverse direction system in which PV (temperature) decreases when output increases.
(b) PWM output enable
PWM output means an output method to turn a junction on – off with a duty proportional to control output calculated by a
uniform output cycle. If PWM output is enabled, it realizes PWM output in accordance with PWM output cycle set in the
parameter of PWM output junction (P20 ~ P3F) designated in the parameter. At the moment, the PWM output cycle follows
the PWM output cycle separately set in auto-tuning operation cycle.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-31
(c) SV
It sets the auto-tuning SV of a loop in question. Similar to PID control, physical values (temperature, flow rate, pressure and
etc) of an object to control is not meaningful and instead, it should use the physical amount of an object to control after
converting them into numerals. For instance, in order to control a system using a sensor that the output is 0V when its
heating device temperature is 0
while it is 10V when the temperature is 100as much as 50, it is necessary to set
SV as 2000(as long as it uses AD input module XBE-AD04A).
(d) Operation time
It sets the cycle to execute operation for auto-tuning. The setting cycle is 0.1ms and available between 10ms ~ 6553.5ms
(setting value: 100 ~ 65,535) while it is set at a unit of integer per 0.1ms.
(e) Max./min. MV
It sets the max./min. value of output for auto-tuning. The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767. If the max. MV is set
lower than min. MV, the auto-tuning function of a loop generates an error and does not work.
(f) Hysteresis setting
Looking at relay tuning in Figure 5.15, it shows it outputs the max. MV as auto-tuning starts but it converts to min. output as
PV is over SV and then, it converts to the max. output as PV is lower than SV. However, if input PV contains noise
components or reply components, auto-tuning ends by a slight vibration of PV around SV, yielding incorrect tuning result.
To prevent it, hysteresis may be set. XGB auto-tuning converts output at SV + Hysteresis when PV increases or at SV –
Hysteresis when it decreases once hysteresis is set. With it, it may prevent incorrect tuning by a slight vibration around SV.
[Figure 5.16 Example of Hysteresis setting ]
PV
MV
SV
Hysteresis
SV+Hysteresis
SV- Hysteresis

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-32

5.6.4 Auto-tuning Flags
The parameters set in the XGB series auto-tuning function are saved to the flash memory of basic unit. Such
parameters are moved to K area for auto-tuning function as soon as PLC enters to RUN mode from STOP. Autotuning operation using auto-tuning command is achieved by data in K area. At the moment, if PLC is changed to
RUN again after being changed to STOP, it takes the parameters in flash memory to K area, so the data changed
in K area is lost. Therefore, to continuously apply the parameters adjusted in K area, it is necessary to write the
parameters set in K area into flash memory by using WRT command. (In case of IEC type, APM_WRT function
block)
(1) Auto-tuning flag configuration
The K area flags of XGB series auto-tuning function are summarized in Table 5.12.

Loops K area IEC type Symbol Data type Default Description
Common K18560~F %KX29696
~%KX29711
_AT_REV Bit Forward Auto-tuning direction(0:forward,
1:reverse)
K18570~F %KX29712
~%KX29727
_AT_PWM_EN Bit Disable PWM output enable(0:disable,
1:enable)
K18580~F %KX29728
~%KX29743
_AT_ERROR Bit - Auto-tuning error(0:normal,1:error)
K1859 %KW1859 Reserved WORD - Reserved area
Loop0 K1860 %KW1860 _AT00_SV INT 0 AT SV – loop 00
K1861 %KW1861 _AT00_T_s WORD 100 AT operation cycle
(T_s)[0.1msec]
K1862 %KW1862 _AT00_MV_max INT 4000 AT MV max. value limit
K1863 %KW1863 _AT00_MV_min INT 0 AT MV min. value limit
K1864 %KW1864 _AT00_PWM WORD 0 AT PWM junction setting
K1865 %KW1865 _AT00_PWM_Prd WORD 0 AT PWM output cycle
K1866 %KW1866 _AT00_HYS_val WORD 0 AT hysteresis setting
K1867 %KW1867 _AT00_STATUS WORD 0 AT auto-tuning status indication
K1868 %KW1868 _AT00_ERR_CODE WORD 0 AT error code
K1869 %KD _AT00_K_p REAL 0 AT result proportional coefficient
K1871 - _AT00_T_i REAL 0 AT result integral time
K1873 - _AT00_T_d REAL 0 AT result differential time
K1875 - _AT00_PV INT 0 AT PV
K1876 - _AT00_MV INT 0 AT MV
K1877~1879 %KW1877
~%KW1879
Reserved Word 0 Reserved area

[Table 5.12 K area flags for auto-tuning]
K1856 ~ K1859 areas (In case of IEC type, %KW1856~%KW1859) are the common bit areas for auto-tuning and each bit
represents auto-tuning loop status respectively. K1860~K1879 areas save the setting and status of loop 0 as the K area for
auto-tuning loop 0. In the area, the parameters such as PV, operation cycle and etc set in the built-in parameter window are
saved and the XGB built-in auto-tuning function executes auto-tuning by the device values and saves the results into the K
areas.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-33
(2) Auto-tuning flag function
Each function of K area flags for XGB series auto-tuning is summarized as follows.
A) Common bit area
The area is a flag collecting operation setting and information consisting of bits to each 16 loop. Each bit of each word
device represents the information of each loop.
1) _AT_REV (auto-tuning run direction setting)
It determines the run direction of auto-tuning of ‘n’ th loop. If the bit is off, it is forward operation; if on, it is reverse operation.
2) _AT_PWM_EN (PWM output enable)
It sets whether to output the auto-tuning MV of ‘n’ th loop as PWM output. If the bit is off, it is disabled; if on, it is enabled.
3) _AT_ERROR (Auto-tuning error occurrence)
It indicates the error in case an error that discontinues operation during auto-tuning of ‘n’th loop occurs. If an error occurs,
it is on; if normal, it is off. Once an error occurs, auto-tuning stops and the MV is output as the min. output set in the
parameter. Also, if an error occurs, it indicates the error code in the error code area of a loop. For more information about
error code types and measures, refer to 5.5. The area, as a dedicated monitor area, is updated although a user directly
enters it.
B) Auto-tuning flag area by loops
The auto-tuning flag areas by loops are K1860 ~ K2179 and each 20 words per loop are allocated to totally 16 loops.
Therefore, individual data area of ‘n’ th loop is between K (1860+16*n) ~ K (1879+16*n).
1) _ATxx_SV (auto-tuning xx Loop SV setting)
It sets/indicates the auto-tuning SV of ‘xx’th loop.
The available scope is between -32,768 ~ 32,767.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_AT_REV
(PID RUN direction setting)
K1856n %KX29696 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_AT_PWM_EN
(PWM output enable)
K1857 %KX29713 + n BIT Available

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Setting
_PID_ERROR
(PID error occurrence)
K1858n %KX29728 + n BIT Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_SV
(AT xx Loop SV setting)
K1860+16*xx %KW1860+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-34

2) _ATxx_T_s (Auto-tuning xx Loop operation cycle)
It sets/indicates the operation cycle of ‘xx’ th loop auto-tuning. The available scope is 100 ~ 65,535.
3) _ATxx_MV_max, _ATxx_MV_min(max. MV, min. MV)
It sets max. MV and min. MV of ‘xx’ th loop respectively. If the max. MV is set lower than min. MV, the autotuning loop generates an error and does not work.
4) _ATxx_PWM (AT output junction setting)
It sets the junction that PWM output of ‘xx’th loop is output. The PWM output junction is valid only between H’20 ~ H’3F
(hex). If any other value is entered, PWM output does not work.
5) _ATxx_PWM_Prd (PWM output cycle setting)
It sets the PWM output cycle of ‘xx’ th loop. The available scope is between 100 ~ 65,535 at the unit of 0.1ms.
6) _ATxx_HYS_val (Hysteresis setting)
It sets the hysteresis of ‘xx’ th loop. For more information about hysteresis function, refer to 5.3.3 AutoTuning Parameter Setting. If it is set as 0, it does not work.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_T_s
(Auto-tuning xx Loop operation cycle)
K1861+16*xx %KW1861+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_PIDxx_MV_max (Max. MV) K1862+16*xx %KW1862+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767
_PIDxx_MV_min (Min. MV) K1863+16*xx %KW1863+16*xx

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_AT00_PWM
(AT output junction setting)
K1864+16*xx %KW1864+16*xx WORD H’20 ~ H’3F

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_PWM_Prd
(PWM output cycle setting)
K1865+16*xx %KW1865+16*xx WORD 100 ~ 65,535

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_HYS_val (Hysteresis setting) K1866+16*xx %KW1866+16*xx WORD 0 ~ 65,535

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-35
7) _ATxx_STATUS (Auto-tuning status)
It indicates the auto-tuning status of ‘xx’ th loop. If auto-tuning is in operation, it is 1(h0001);
if completed, it is 128(h0080). In any other cases, it shows 0(h0000).
8) _ATxx_ERR_CODE (Error code)
It indicates error code in case an error occurs during the auto-tuning of ‘xx’th loop. The flag, as a dedicated monitor, is
updated although a user directly enters it. For more information about error code, refer to 5.5.
9) _ATxx_K_p, _ATxx_T_i, _ATxx_T_d (AT result proportional coefficient, integral time, differential time)
The area indicates proportional coefficient, integral time and differential time calculated after the auto-tuning of ‘xx’ th loop
is normally completed. The flag, as a dedicated monitoring, updated although a user directly enters it.
10) _ATxx_PV (PV)
It is the area to receive PV of ‘xx’ th auto-tuning loop. PV is the present status of a system to control and in case of PID
control, the entry from a sensor is saved into U device through input devices such as A/D input module and it moves the
value to _ATxx_PV by using commands such as MOV every scanning, executing auto-tuning.
11) _ATxx_MV (Auto-tuning MV)
It is the area to output MV of ‘xx’ th auto-tuning loop. Every auto-tuning cycle, it saves XGB auto-tuning and it delivers the
value in the area by using commands like MOV in a program and operates a drive every scanning.

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_STATUS
(Auto-tuning status)
K1867+16*xx %KW1867+16*xx WORD Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_ERR_CODE
(Error code)
K1868+16*xx %KW1868+16*xx WORD Unavailable

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_K_p
(proportional coefficient)
K1869+16*xx %KD934+20*xx Real Unavailable
_ATxx_T_i
(integral time)
K1871+16*xx %KD1004+20*xx
_ATxx_T_d
(differential time)
K1873+16*xx %K1005+20*xx

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_PV (PV) K1875+16*xx %KW1875+16*xx INT -32,768 ~ 32,767

 

Flag name Address IEC type address Unit Scope
_ATxx_MV (auto-tuning MV) K1876+16*xx %KW1876+16*xx INT Unavailable

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-36

5.6.5 Auto-tuning Instructions
The commands used in XGB series auto-tuning are as follows.
1) PIDAT
PIDAT is a command to execute auto-tuning by loops.
- Operand S means the loop no. to execute auto-tuning and avaiable only for constant(0~15).
- If start signal contact is on, the PID control of a loop starts.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-37
5.7 Example Programs
The paragraph explains example programs regarding the directions of XGB built-in PID function.
The example programs are explained with water level system as illustrated in 5.17.
[ Figure 5.17 Example of water level control system ]
5.7.1 Example System Structure
The example system in figure is an example of a system to control a pail’s water level to a desired level. The pail’s water level is
sensed by a water level sensor and entered to A/D input module while PID control operation result, MV is output to a pump
through D/A output module, controlling a pump’s rotation velocity, regulating the water amount flowing into a pail and regulating
the water level as desired. Each mechanism is explained as follows.
(1) XGB basic unit
The XGB basic unit operates by PID control operating PID control operation. It receives PV from A/D input module (XBFAD04A), executes the built-in PID control operation, output the MV to D/A (XBF-DV04A) and executes PID control.
(2) A/D input module (XBF-AD04A)
It functions as receiving PV of an object to control from a water level sensor and delivering it to basic unit. XBF-AD04A is a
4CH analog input module and settings of analog input types and scopes can be changed in the I/O parameter setting
window appeared when selecting I/O parameter in the parameter item of project window. For more information, refer to
Analog I/O Module.
(3) D/A output module (XBF-DV04A)
It functions as delivering control MV from basic unit to a drive (pump). XBF-DV04A is a 4CH analog voltage output module
and ranges 0 ~ 10V. For detail setting, refer to Analog I/O Module.
수통
XG5000
RS-232C
0~10V
0~10V
Tank
Pump
Water
level sensor
XGB D/A A/D
Tank

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-38

(4) Water Level Sensor
A water level sensor plays a role to deliver the PV of an object to control to XGB by measuring the water level of a pail and
outputting it within 0 ~ 10V. Since the types and output scope of water level sensors varies, the output scope of a sensor
should be identical with that ofA/D input module’s input scope. The example uses a water level sensor outputting between 0
~ 10V.
(5) Drive (pump)
A drive uses a pump that receives control output of XGF-DV04A and of which rotation velocity is variable. For accurate PID
control, the output scope of XBF-DV04A (0~10V) should be same with that of a pump’s control input. The example uses a pump
that receives its control input between 0 ~ 10V.
5.7.2 Example of PID Auto-tuning
Here, with examples, it explains how to calculate proportional constant, integral time and differential time by using PID autotuning function
(1) PID auto-tuning parameter setting
(a) If double-clicking Parameter – Built-in Parameter – PID – Auto-tuning parameter in the project window, it opens up the
auto-tuning parameter setting window as illustrated in Figure 5.18.
[Figure 5.18 Auto-tuning parameter setting window]
(b) Set each parameter and click OK.
In the example, Loop 0 is set as follows.
RUN direction: forward
- Since in the system, water level is going up as MV increases and pump’s rotation velocity increases, it should be
set as forward operation.
PWM output: disabled
- In the example, auto-tuning using PWM is not executed. Therefore, PWM output is set as disabled.
SV: 1000(2.5V)
- It shows an example in which XBF-AD04A is set as the voltage input of 0~10V.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-39
Max. MV: 4000
- Max. MV is set as 4000. If MV is 4000, XBF-DV04A outputs 10V.
Min. MV: 0
- Min. MV is set as 0. If MV is 0, XBF-DV04A outputs 0V.
PWM junction, PWM output cycle
- It is not necessary to set it because the example does not use PWM output.
Hysteresis setting: 10
(2) A/D input module parameter setting
(a) If double-clicking Parameter – I/O parameter, it opens up the setting window as illustrated in figure 5.19.
[ Figure 5.19 I/O parameter setting window ]
(b) If selecting A/D module for a slot in A/D input module, it opens up the setting window as illustrated in Figure 5.20.
[ Figure 5.20 A/D input mode setting window ]

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-40

(c) Check A/D Module operation parameter and click OK. The example is set as follows.
RUN CH: CH0 RUN
- The example receives the water level sensor input as CH0.
Input scope: 0 ~ 10V
- Set XBF-AD04A input scope as 0 ~ 10V so that it should be identical with the output scope of water level sensor.
Output data type: 0 ~ 4000
- It converts the input 0 ~ 10V to digital value from 0 ~ 4000 and delivers it to basic unit.
- In the case, the resolving power of digital value 1 is 10/4000 = 2.5mV
Filter process, averaging: disabled
- The example sets the input values in order that filter process and averaging are not available.
- For more information about each function, refer to Analog Manual.
(3) D/A Output Module Parameter setting
(a) Set the parameter of D/A output module(XBF-DV04A) that output MV to a drive.
How to set them is as same as A/D input module. In the example, it is set as follows.
RUN CH: CH0 RUN
- In the example, MV is output as CH0 of D/A output module.
Output range : 0 ~ 10V
Input type: 0 ~ 4000
Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-41
(4) Example of PID Auto-tuning program
The example of PID auto-tuning program is illustrated as Figure 5.21.
< Figure 5.21 Auto-tuning example program >
(a) Devices used

Device Data type Application
F0099 BIT It is always on, so it readily operates once PLC is RUN.
U02.02.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 2 A/D input module.
U03.02.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Slot 3 D/A output module.
U02.02 INT PV entered to A/D input module.
U03.03 INT MV entered to D/A output module.
K1875 INT Device to which PV is entered for LOOP 0 auto-tuning
K1876 INT Device to which auto-tuning MV of LOOP 0 is output.
K1867 WORD Device to which auto-tuning status indicates.
K18580 BIT Junction that is on once auto-tuning has an error.
K1863 INT Min. MV of auto-tuning designated in parameter.

(b) Program explanation
1) Since F0099(always on) is ON if PLC is converted form STOP to RUN, CH0 of A/D and D/A starts operating.
2) At the moment, PV entered to CH0 of A/D is moved to K1875, the input device of PV and saved accordingly.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-42

3) Once M0000 junction is on, the auto-tuning of loop 0 starts.
4) The auto-tuning MV of loop 0 that is output by PIDAT command is output to D/A output module by line 14 MOV
command.
5) If auto-tuning is complete or there is any error during auto-tuning, M0001 junction is set, blocking operation of PIDAT
command and it outputs min. MV set in parameter to D/A output module.
(c) Monitoring and changing PID control variables using K area
In XGB series built-in auto-tuning, it can monitor and change RUN status of auto-tuning by using K area allocated as
fixed area by loops.
1) Variable registration
If selecting “Register in Variable/Description” by right clicking in the variable monitor window, “Variable/Device
Selection” window appears. Select “Item” as PID, deselect “ViewAll” and enter 0(means loop number) in
“Parameter No”, K area device list to save every setting and status of loop 0 appears as shown Figure 5.22. Then, if
selecting a variable to monitor and clicking “OK”, a selected device is registered to variable monitor window as
illustrated in Figure 5.23. Through the monitor window, a user can monitor auto-tuning run status or change the
settings.
[Figure 5.22 Variable registration window]
[Figure 5.23 Auto-tuning variables registered]

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-43
(5) Observing RUN status by using trend monitor function
Since it is possible to monitor the operation status of XGB series built-in auto-tuning graphically, it is useful to monitor the
operation status of auto-tuning clearly.
(a) If selecting Monitor – Trend monitor menu, it shows the trend monitor widow as illustrated in Figure 5.24.
[ Figure 5.24 Trend Monitor window ]
(b) If right-clicking trend setting, a user can select a variable to monitor as illustrated in Figure 5.25.
[ Figure 5.25 window to register trend monitor variable ]
(c) For more information about trend monitor, refer to “XG5000 Use’s Manual.”

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-44

5.7.3 Stand-alone Operation After PID Auto-tuning
Here, with example, it explains how to execute PID control followed by PID auto-tuning.
(1) PID auto-tuning parameter setting
▪ PID auto-tuning parameters are set as same as examples of 5.4.2 Example of PID Auto-tuning.
(2) Setting parameters of A/D input module and D/A output module
▪ Set the parameters of A/D input module and D/A output module as same as the example in 5.4.2 Example of PID
Auto-tuning.
(3) PID parameter setting
(a) If double-clicking Parameter – Built-in Parameter – PID – PID Parameter, it shows the built-in PID parameter setting
window as seen in Figure 5.26.
[ Figure 5.26 Auto-tuning parameter setting window ]
(b) Set each parameter and click OK.
In the example, Loop 0 is set as follows.
RUN mode: automatic
- Set as automatic in order that PID control is executed as the built-in PID operation outputs MV.
RUN direction: forward
- Since in the system, water level is going up as MV increases and pump’s rotation velocity increases, it should
be set as forward operation.
PWM Output: disabled
- In the example, auto-tuning using PWM is not executed. Therefore, PWM output is set as disabled.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-45
SV: 1000(2.5V)
- It shows an example in which XBF-AD04A is set as the voltage input of 0~10V
Operation cycle: 1000
- In the example, it is set that PID control is executed every 100ms.
Proportional gain, integral time and differential time
- It should be initially set as 1,0,0 because PID auto-tuning results is used with PID constant.
Max. MV: 4000
- Max. MV is set as 4000. If MV is 4000, XBF-DV04A outputs 10V.
DeadBand: 0
- It is set as 0 because the example does not use DeadBand function.
Differential filter setting: 0
- it is also set as 0 because the example does not use differential filter.
Min. MV: 0
- Min. MV is set as 0. If MV is 0, XBF-DV04A outputs 0V.
PWM junction, PWM output cycle
- It is not necessary to set them because the example does not use PWM output.
SV ramp, PV follow-up: 0
- It is not necessary to set SV ramp and PV follow-up because the example does not use them.
Min. PV, Max. PV: 0
- Set them as 0 and 4000 respectively so that it could be identical with A/D input module’s input scope.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-46

(c) Example of PID control program after PID auto-tuning
The program example for PID auto-tuning is illustrated as Figure 5.27.
[Figure 5.27 Example program of PID control after auto-tuning]
1) Devices used

Device Data type Application
F0099 BIT It is always on, so it readily operates once PLC is RUN.
U01.01.0 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Built-in A/D input module.
U01.10.2 BIT It starts operation of CH0 of Built-in D/A output module.
U01.03 INT PV entered to A/D input module.
U01.13 INT MV entered to D/A output module.
K1875 INT Device to which PV is entered for LOOP 0 auto-tuning
K1876 INT Device to which auto-tuning MV of LOOP 0 is output.
K1867 WORD Device to which auto-tuning status indicates.
K18580 BIT Junction that is on once auto-tuning has an error.
K1869 REAL proportional coefficient calculated after the auto-tuning
K1871 REAL integral time calculated after the auto-tuning.
K1873 REAL differential time calculated after the auto-tuning.

Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-47

K1218 REAL proportional coefficient of PID designated in parameter.
K1220 REAL integral time of PID designated in parameter.
K1222 REAL differential time of PID designated in parameter.
K1229 INT Device to which PV is entered for Loop 0 PID control
K1876 INT Device to which MV of loop 0 PID control is output.

2) Program explanation
a) Since F0099 (always on) is ON if PLC is converted form STOP to RUN, CH0 of A/D and D/A starts operating.
b) Once M0000 junction is on, the auto-tuning of loop 0 starts. At the moment, PV entered to CH0 of A/D is moved to
K1875, the PV input device of loop 0 and saved accordingly.
c) The auto-tuning MV of Loop 0 output by PIDAT command is output to D/A output module by line 11, MOV command.
d) Once auto-tuning is complete, it moves P, I, D coefficients generated from auto-tuning to the input devices of P, I and
D, K1218,K1220 and K1222, sets M001 and starts the operation of PID loop 0.

Basis
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function

5-48

5.8 Error / Warning Codes
It describes error codes and warning codes of the XGB built-in PID function. The error codes and warning codes that may occur
during use of the XGB built-in PID function are summarized as table. If any error or warning occurs, remove potential causes of
the error by referring to the tables.
5.8.1 Error Codes

Error
codes
Indications Measures
H’0001 MV_MIN_MAX_ERR It occurs when max. MV is set lower than min. MV. Make sure to
set max. MV larger than min. MV.
H’0002 PV_MIN_MAX_ERR It occurs when max. PV is set lower min. Pv. Make sure to set
max. PV larger than min. PV.
H’0003 PWM_PERIOD_ERR It occurs when the period of auto tuning or PID operation loop is
set under 100(10ms). Make sure to set output period more than
100.
H’0004 SV_RANGE_ERR It occurs when SV is larger than PV at the start time of auto-tuning
if auto-tuning is forward or when SV is larger than PV at the start
time of auto-tuning if auto-tuning is reverse.
H’0005 PWM_ADDRESS_ERR It occurs when the junction designated as PWM output junction is
beyond between P20 ~ P3F.
H’0006 P_GAIN_SET_ERR It occurs when proportional constant is set lower than 0.
H’0007 I_TIME_SET_ERR It occurs when integral time is set lower than 0.
H’0008 D_TIME_SET_ERR It occurs when differential time is set lower than 0.
H’0009 CONTROL_MODE_ERR It occurs when control mode is not P, PI, PD or PID.
H’000A TUNE_DIR_CHG_ERR It occurs when operation direction is changed during auto-tuning.
Never attempt to change operation direction during auto-tuning.
H000B PID_PERIOD_ERR It occurs when period of operation is smaller than 100 (10ms) at
Auto-tuning or PID operation.
Make sure to set period of operation larger than 100.
H000C HBD_WRONG_DIR In mixed operation, It occurs when the direction parameter of
forward operation set to reverse operation or the direction
parameter of reverse operation set to forward operation. Make
sure set to appropriate direction each loop.
H000D HBD_SV_NOT_MATCH In mixed operation, it occurs when the Set value of each loop is
not concurrent. Make sure set to Set value concurrently.
- - If the PID LOOP number is outside the settable range, the
command will not be executed without an error code. The range
that can be set is 0 ~ 15.

[Table 5.13 : PID error codes]
Main
Chapter 5 Built-in PID Function
5-49
5.8.2 Warning Codes

Error
codes
Indications Measures
H’0001 PV_MIN_MAX_ALM It occurs when the set PV is beyond the min./max. PV.
H’0002 PID_SCANTIME_ALM It occurs when PID operation cycle is too short. It is desirable to
set PID operation cycle longer than PLC scan time.
H’0003 PID_dPV_WARN It occurs when the PV change of PID cycle exceeds PV change
limit.
H’0004 PID_dMV_WARN It occurs when the PV cycle MV change exceeds MV change
limit.
H’0005 PID_MV_MAX_WARN It occurs when the calculated MV of PID cycle exceeds the max.
MV.
H’0006 PID_MV_MIN_WARN It occurs when the calculated MV of PID cycle is smaller than the
min. MV

[Table 5.14 : PID error codes]
Positioning
Chapter 1 Overview

1-1

Part 3. Embedded Positioning
Chapter 1 Overview
Part 3 describes the specification, method to use each positioning function, programming and the wiring with external equipment
of embedded positioning function.
1.1 Characteristics
The characteristics of